WO2008117981A1 - Dtv receiving system and method of processing dtv signal - Google Patents

Dtv receiving system and method of processing dtv signal Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2008117981A1
WO2008117981A1 PCT/KR2008/001681 KR2008001681W WO2008117981A1 WO 2008117981 A1 WO2008117981 A1 WO 2008117981A1 KR 2008001681 W KR2008001681 W KR 2008001681W WO 2008117981 A1 WO2008117981 A1 WO 2008117981A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
data
timing error
dtv
known data
detected
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/KR2008/001681
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Jong Moon Kim
In Hwan Choi
Kook Yeon Kwak
Byoung Gill Kim
Won Gyu Song
Jin Woo Kim
Hyoung Gon Lee
Original Assignee
Lg Electronics Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Lg Electronics Inc. filed Critical Lg Electronics Inc.
Priority to EP08723717A priority Critical patent/EP2130382A4/en
Priority to CN2008800102455A priority patent/CN101647289B/en
Priority to MX2009010194A priority patent/MX2009010194A/en
Priority to CA2681046A priority patent/CA2681046C/en
Publication of WO2008117981A1 publication Critical patent/WO2008117981A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/85Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using pre-processing or post-processing specially adapted for video compression
    • H04N19/89Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using pre-processing or post-processing specially adapted for video compression involving methods or arrangements for detection of transmission errors at the decoder
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/20Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/23Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
    • H04N21/235Processing of additional data, e.g. scrambling of additional data or processing content descriptors
    • H04N21/2353Processing of additional data, e.g. scrambling of additional data or processing content descriptors specifically adapted to content descriptors, e.g. coding, compressing or processing of metadata
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/004Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
    • H04L1/0056Systems characterized by the type of code used
    • H04L1/0059Convolutional codes
    • H04L1/006Trellis-coded modulation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/004Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
    • H04L1/0056Systems characterized by the type of code used
    • H04L1/0064Concatenated codes
    • H04L1/0065Serial concatenated codes
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/004Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
    • H04L1/0056Systems characterized by the type of code used
    • H04L1/007Unequal error protection
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/004Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
    • H04L1/0056Systems characterized by the type of code used
    • H04L1/0071Use of interleaving
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/02Amplitude-modulated carrier systems, e.g. using on-off keying; Single sideband or vestigial sideband modulation
    • H04L27/06Demodulator circuits; Receiver circuits
    • H04L27/066Carrier recovery circuits
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/18Phase-modulated carrier systems, i.e. using phase-shift keying
    • H04L27/22Demodulator circuits; Receiver circuits
    • H04L27/227Demodulator circuits; Receiver circuits using coherent demodulation
    • H04L27/2271Demodulator circuits; Receiver circuits using coherent demodulation wherein the carrier recovery circuit uses only the demodulated signals
    • H04L27/2272Demodulator circuits; Receiver circuits using coherent demodulation wherein the carrier recovery circuit uses only the demodulated signals using phase locked loops
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L7/00Arrangements for synchronising receiver with transmitter
    • H04L7/02Speed or phase control by the received code signals, the signals containing no special synchronisation information
    • H04L7/027Speed or phase control by the received code signals, the signals containing no special synchronisation information extracting the synchronising or clock signal from the received signal spectrum, e.g. by using a resonant or bandpass circuit
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L7/00Arrangements for synchronising receiver with transmitter
    • H04L7/04Speed or phase control by synchronisation signals
    • H04L7/041Speed or phase control by synchronisation signals using special codes as synchronising signal
    • H04L7/042Detectors therefor, e.g. correlators, state machines
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/20Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/23Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
    • H04N21/238Interfacing the downstream path of the transmission network, e.g. adapting the transmission rate of a video stream to network bandwidth; Processing of multiplex streams
    • H04N21/2383Channel coding or modulation of digital bit-stream, e.g. QPSK modulation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/41Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
    • H04N21/426Internal components of the client ; Characteristics thereof
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/438Interfacing the downstream path of the transmission network originating from a server, e.g. retrieving MPEG packets from an IP network
    • H04N21/4382Demodulation or channel decoding, e.g. QPSK demodulation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N5/00Details of television systems
    • H04N5/44Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards
    • H04N5/455Demodulation-circuits

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a digital television (DTV) systems and methods of processing television signals.
  • DTV digital television
  • the Vestigial Sideband (VSB) transmission mode which is adopted as the standard for digital broadcasting in North America and the Republic of Korea, is a system using a single carrier method. Therefore, the receiving performance of the digital broadcast receiving system may be deteriorated in a poor channel environment. Disclosure of Invention
  • the present invention is directed to DTV systems and methods of processing television signals that substantially obviate one or more problems due to limitations and disadvantages of the related art.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide DTV systems and methods of processing television signals that are highly resistant to channel changes and noise.
  • Another object of the present invention is to provide DTV systems and methods of processing television signals that can enhance the receiving performance of a digital broadcast receiving system by performing additional encoding on mobile service data and by transmitting the processed data to the receiving system.
  • a further object of the present invention is to provide DTV systems and methods of processing television signals that can also enhance the receiving performance of a digital broadcast receiving system by inserting known data already known in accordance with a pre-agreement between the receiving system and the transmitting system in a predetermined area within a data area.
  • a digital television (DTV) receiving system includes an information detector, a resampler, a timing recovery unit, and a carrier recovery unit.
  • the information detector detects a known data sequence which is periodically inserted in a digital television (DTV) signal received from a DTV transmitting system.
  • the resampler resamples the DTV signal at a predetermined resampling rate.
  • the timing recovery unit performs timing recovery on the DTV signal by detecting a timing error from the resampled DTV signal using the detected known data sequence.
  • the carrier recovery unit performs carrier recovery on the resampled DTV signal by estimating a frequency offset value of the resampled DTV signal using the detected known data sequence.
  • the timing recovery unit includes a timing error detector which detecting the timing error by calculating correlation between the detected known data sequence and a reference data sequence. More specifically, the timing error may be detected by calculating a correlation value between an entire portion of the known data sequence and an entire portion of the reference data sequence. Alternatively, correlation values between a plurality of divided portions of the known data sequence and a plurality of divided portions of the reference data sequence can be calculated in order to obtain the timing error.
  • the timing recovery unit may includes a timing error detector which detects the timing error by calculating a correlation value between two known data sequences detected from the DTV signals in the frequency domain.
  • the known data sequences used to obtain the timing error may be consecutive.
  • FIG. 1 illustrates a block diagram of a digital broadcast system according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 2 illustrates a block diagram of a service multiplexer of FIG. 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 3 illustrates a block diagram of a transmitter of FIG. 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 4 illustrates a block diagram of a pre-processor of FIG. 3 according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 5 (a) to FIG. 5(e) illustrate process steps of error correction encoding and error detection encoding processes according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 respectively illustrate examples of a data structure before and after a data deinterleaver in a digital broadcast transmitting system according to the present invention
  • FIG. 8 illustrates an example of a process for dividing a RS frame in order to configure a data group according to the present invention
  • FIG. 9 illustrates an example of an operation of a packet multiplexer for transmitting the data group according to the present invention
  • FIG. 10 illustrates a block diagram of a block processor according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 11 illustrates a detailed block diagram of a symbol encoder of FIG. 10
  • FIG. 12(a) to FIG. 12(c) illustrates an example of a variable length interleaving process of a symbol interleaver shown in FIG. 10;
  • FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 respectively illustrate block diagrams of a block processor according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 15(a) to FIG. 15(c) illustrates an example of a block encoding and trellis encoding processes according to the present invention
  • FIG. 16 illustrates a block diagram of a trellis encoding module according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 illustrate a block processor and a trellis encoding module being connected to one another according to the present invention
  • FIG. 19 illustrates a block processor according to yet another embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 20 illustrates a block processor according to yet another embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 21 illustrates an example of a group formatter inserting and transmitting a transmission parameter
  • FIG. 22 illustrates an example of a block processor inserting and transmitting a transmission parameter
  • FIG. 23 illustrates an example of a packet formatter inserting and transmitting a transmission parameter
  • FIG. 24 illustrates an example for inserting and transmitting the transmission parameter in a field synchronization segment area
  • FIG. 36 FIG.
  • FIG. 25 illustrates a block diagram of a digital broadcast receiving system according to the present invention
  • FIG. 26 illustrates an example of an error correction decoding process according to the present invention
  • FIG. 27 illustrates an example of a data structure of a VSB signal transmitted by a digital broadcast transmitting system according to the present invention
  • FIG. 28 illustrates a detailed block diagram of an example of a demodulator according to the present invention
  • FIG. 29 illustrates a first example of the timing recovery unit according to the present invention
  • FIG. 30 illustrates a second example of the timing recovery unit according to the present invention
  • FIG. 31 (a) and FIG. 31(b) illustrate examples of detecting timing error in a time domain
  • FIG. 32(a) and FIG. 32(b) illustrate other examples of detecting timing error in a time domain
  • FIG. 33 illustrates an example of detecting timing error using correlation values of
  • main service data correspond to data that can be received by a fixed receiving system and may include audio/video (A/V) data. More specifically, the main service data may include A/V data of high definition (HD) or standard definition (SD) levels and may also include diverse data types required for data broadcasting. Also, the known data correspond to data pre- known in accordance with a pre-arranged agreement between the receiving system and the transmitting system. Additionally, in the present invention, mobile service data may include at least one of mobile service data, pedestrian service data, and handheld service data, and are collectively referred to as mobile service data for simplicity.
  • the mobile service data not only correspond to mobile/pedestrian/handheld service data (M/P/H service data) but may also include any type of service data with mobile or portable characteristics. Therefore, the mobile service data according to the present invention are not limited only to the M/P/H service data.
  • the above-described mobile service data may correspond to data having information, such as program execution files, stock information, and so on, and may also correspond to A/V data.
  • the mobile service data may correspond to A/V data having lower resolution and lower data rate as compared to the main service data.
  • A/V codec that is used for a conventional main service corresponds to a MPEG-2 codec
  • AVC MPEG-4 advanced video coding
  • SVC scalable video coding
  • any type of data may be transmitted as the mobile service data.
  • TPEG transport protocol expert group
  • TPEG transport protocol expert group
  • a data service using the mobile service data may include weather forecast services, traffic information services, stock information services, viewer participation quiz programs, real-time polls & surveys, interactive education broadcast programs, gaming services, services providing information on synopsis, character, background music, and filming sites of soap operas or series, services providing information on past match scores and player profiles and achievements, and services providing information on product information and programs classified by service, medium, time, and theme enabling purchase orders to be processed.
  • the present invention is not limited only to the services mentioned above.
  • the transmitting system provides backward compatibility in the main service data so as to be received by the conventional receiving system.
  • the main service data and the mobile service data are multiplexed to the same physical channel and then transmitted.
  • the transmitting system according to the present invention performs additional encoding on the mobile service data and inserts the data already known by the receiving system and transmitting system (i.e., known data), thereby transmitting the processed data. Therefore, when using the transmitting system according to the present invention, the receiving system may receive the mobile service data during a mobile state and may also receive the mobile service data with stability despite various distortion and noise occurring within the channel.
  • FIG. 1 illustrates a block diagram showing a general structure of a digital broadcast transmitting system according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the digital broadcast transmitting includes a service multiplexer 100 and a transmitter 200.
  • the service multiplexer 100 is located in the studio of each broadcast station, and the transmitter 200 is located in a site placed at a predetermined distance from the studio.
  • the transmitter 200 may be located in a plurality of different locations.
  • the plurality of transmitters may share the same frequency.
  • the plurality of transmitters receives the same signal.
  • a channel equalizer may compensate signal distortion, which is caused by a reflected wave, so as to recover the original signal.
  • the plurality of transmitters may have different frequencies with respect to the same channel.
  • a variety of methods may be used for data communication each of the transmitters, which are located in remote positions, and the service multiplexer.
  • an interface standard such as a synchronous serial interface for transport of MPEG-2 data (SMPTE-310M).
  • SMPTE-310M synchronous serial interface for transport of MPEG-2 data
  • a constant data rate is decided as an output data rate of the service multiplexer.
  • the output data rate is 19.39 Mbps
  • the output data rate is 38.78 Mbps.
  • a transport stream (TS) packet having a data rate of approximately 19.39 Mbps may be transmitted through a single physical channel.
  • the transmitting system according to the present invention provided with backward compatibility with the conventional transmitting system, additional encoding is performed on the mobile service data. Thereafter, the additionally encoded mobile service data are multiplexed with the main service data to a TS packet form, which is then transmitted. At this point, the data rate of the multiplexed TS packet is approximately 19.39 Mbps.
  • the service multiplexer 100 receives at least one type of mobile service data and program specific information (PSI)/program and system information protocol (PSIP) table data for each mobile service and encapsulates the received data to each transport stream (TS) packet. Also, the service multiplexer 100 receives at least one type of main service data and PSI/PSIP table data for each main service so as to encapsulate the received data to a TS packet. Subsequently, the TS packets are multiplexed according to a predetermined multiplexing rule and outputs the multiplexed packets to the transmitter 200.
  • PSI program specific information
  • PSIP program and system information protocol
  • FIG. 2 illustrates a block diagram showing an example of the service multiplexer.
  • the service multiplexer includes a controller 110 for controlling the overall operations of the service multiplexer, a PSI/PSIP generator 120 for the main service, a PSI/PSIP generator 130 for the mobile service, a null packet generator 140, a mobile service multiplexer 150, and a transport multiplexer 160.
  • the transport multiplexer 160 may include a main service multiplexer 161 and a transport stream (TS) packet multiplexer 162. Referring to FIG. 2, at least one type of compression encoded main service data and the PSI/PSIP table data generated from the PSI/PSIP generator 120 for the main service are inputted to the main service multiplexer 161 of the transport multiplexer 160.
  • TS transport stream
  • the main service multiplexer 161 encapsulates each of the inputted main service data and PSI/PSIP table data to MPEG-2 TS packet forms. Then, the MPEG-2 TS packets are multiplexed and outputted to the TS packet multiplexer 162.
  • the data packet being outputted from the main service multiplexer 161 will be referred to as a main service data packet for simplicity.
  • PSI/PSIP table data generated from the PSI/PSIP generator 130 for the mobile service are inputted to the mobile service multiplexer 150.
  • the mobile service multiplexer 150 encapsulates each of the inputted mobile service data and PSI/PSIP table data to MPEG-2 TS packet forms.
  • the MPEG-2 TS packets are multiplexed and outputted to the TS packet multiplexer 162.
  • the data packet being outputted from the mobile service multiplexer 150 will be referred to as a mobile service data packet for simplicity.
  • the transmitter 200 requires identification information in order to identify and process the main service data packet and the mobile service data packet.
  • the identification information may use values pre-decided in accordance with an agreement between the transmitting system and the receiving system, or may be configured of a separate set of data, or may modify predetermined location value with in the corresponding data packet.
  • a different packet identifier PID may be assigned to identify each of the main service data packet and the mobile service data packet.
  • the service data packet may be identified by using the synchronization data byte value of the corresponding service data packet.
  • the synchronization byte of the main service data packet directly outputs the value decided by the ISO/IEC13818-1 standard (i.e., 0x47) without any modification.
  • the synchronization byte of the mobile service data packet modifies and outputs the value, thereby identifying the main service data packet and the mobile service data packet.
  • the synchronization byte of the main service data packet is modified and outputted, whereas the synchronization byte of the mobile service data packet is directly outputted without being modified, thereby enabling the main service data packet and the mobile service data packet to be identified.
  • a plurality of methods may be applied in the method of modifying the synchronization byte.
  • each bit of the synchronization byte may be inversed, or only a portion of the synchronization byte may be inversed.
  • any type of identification information may be used to identify the main service data packet and the mobile service data packet. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited only to the example set forth in the description of the present invention.
  • a transport multiplexer used in the conventional digital broadcasting system may be used as the transport multiplexer 160 according to the present invention. More specifically, in order to multiplex the mobile service data and the main service data and to transmit the multiplexed data, the data rate of the main service is limited to a data rate of (19.39-K) Mbps. Then, K Mbps, which corresponds to the remaining data rate, is assigned as the data rate of the mobile service. Thus, the transport multiplexer which is already being used may be used as it is without any modification.
  • the transport multiplexer 160 multiplexes the main service data packet being outputted from the main service multiplexer 161 and the mobile service data packet being outputted from the mobile service multiplexer 150. Thereafter, the transport multiplexer 160 transmits the multiplexed data packets to the transmitter 200.
  • the output data rate of the mobile service multiplexer 150 may not be equal to K Mbps.
  • the mobile service multiplexer 150 multiplexes and outputs null data packets generated from the null packet generator 140 so that the output data rate can reach K Mbps. More specifically, in order to match the output data rate of the mobile service multiplexer 150 to a constant data rate, the null packet generator 140 generates null data packets, which are then outputted to the mobile service multiplexer 150.
  • the service multiplexer 100 assigns K Mbps of the 19.39 Mbps to the mobile service data, and when the remaining (19.39-K) Mbps is, therefore, assigned to the main service data, the data rate of the mobile service data that are multiplexed by the service multiplexer 100 actually becomes lower than K Mbps.
  • the pre-processor of the transmitting system performs additional encoding, thereby increasing the amount of data.
  • the data rate of the mobile service data which may be transmitted from the service multiplexer 100, becomes smaller than K Mbps.
  • the pre-processor of the transmitter performs an encoding process on the mobile service data at a coding rate of at least 1/2
  • the amount of the data outputted from the pre-processor is increased to more than twice the amount of the data initially inputted to the pre-processor. Therefore, the sum of the data rate of the main service data and the data rate of the mobile service data, both being multiplexed by the service multiplexer 100, becomes either equal to or smaller than 19.39 Mbps.
  • an amount of null data packets corresponding to the amount of lacking data rate is generated from the null packet generator 140 and outputted to the mobile service multiplexer 150.
  • the mobile service multiplexer 150 encapsulates each of the mobile service data and the PSFPSIP table data that are being inputted to a MPEG-2 TS packet form. Then, the above-described TS packets are multiplexed with the null data packets and, then, outputted to the TS packet multiplexer 162. Thereafter, the TS packet multiplexer 162 multiplexes the main service data packet being outputted from the main service multiplexer 161 and the mobile service data packet being outputted from the mobile service multiplexer 150 and transmits the multiplexed data packets to the transmitter 200 at a data rate of 19.39 Mbps.
  • the mobile service multiplexer [68] According to an embodiment of the present invention, the mobile service multiplexer
  • the TS packet multiplexer 162 may receive the null data packets, so as to match the data rate of the finally outputted data to a constant data rate.
  • the output path and multiplexing rule of the null data packet is controlled by the controller 110.
  • the controller 110 controls the multiplexing processed performed by the mobile service multiplexer 150, the main service multiplexer 161 of the transport multiplexer 160, and the TS packet multiplexer 162, and also controls the null data packet generation of the null packet generator 140.
  • the transmitter 200 discards the null data packets transmitted from the service multiplexer 100 instead of transmitting the null data packets.
  • identification information for identifying the null data packet is required.
  • the identification information may use values pre-decided in accordance with an agreement between the transmitting system and the receiving system. For example, the value of the synchronization byte within the header of the null data packet may be modified so as to be used as the identification information. Alternatively, a transport_error _indicator flag may also be used as the identification information.
  • the transport_error_indicator flag of the null data packet is set to T, and the transport_error_indicator flag of the remaining data packets are reset to '0', so as to identify the null data packet. More specifically, when the null packet generator 140 generates the null data packets, if the transport_error_indicator flag from the header field of the null data packet is set to T and then transmitted, the null data packet may be identified and, therefore, be discarded. In the present invention, any type of identification information for identifying the null data packets may be used. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited only to the examples set forth in the description of the present invention.
  • a transmission parameter may be included in at least a portion of the null data packet, or at least one table or an operations and maintenance (OM) packet (or OMP) of the PSI/PSIP table for the mobile service.
  • the transmitter 200 extracts the transmission parameter and outputs the extracted transmission parameter to the corresponding block and also transmits the extracted parameter to the receiving system if required.
  • a packet referred to as an OMP is defined for the purpose of operating and managing the transmitting system.
  • the OMP is configured in accordance with the MPEG-2 TS packet format, and the corresponding PID is given the value of OxIFFA.
  • the OMP is configured of a 4-byte header and a 184-byte pay load.
  • the first byte corresponds to an OM_type field, which indicates the type of the OM packet.
  • the transmission parameter may be transmitted in the form of an OMP. And, in this case, among the values of the reserved fields within the OM_type field, a pre-arranged value is used, thereby indicating that the transmission parameter is being transmitted to the transmitter 200 in the form of an OMP. More spe- cifically, the transmitter 200 may find (or identify) the OMP by referring to the PID. Also, by parsing the OM_type field within the OMP, the transmitter 200 can verify whether a transmission parameter is included after the OM_type field of the corresponding packet. The transmission parameter corresponds to supplemental data required for processing mobile service data from the transmitting system and the receiving system.
  • the transmission parameter may include data group information, region information within the data group, RS frame information, super frame information, burst information, turbo code information, and RS code information.
  • the burst information may include burst size information, burst period information, and time information to next burst.
  • the burst period signifies the period at which the burst transmitting the same mobile service is repeated.
  • the data group includes a plurality of mobile service data packets, and a plurality of such data groups is gathered (or grouped) to form a burst.
  • a burst section signifies the beginning of a current burst to the beginning of a next burst.
  • the burst section is classified as a section that includes the data group (also referred to as a burst-on section), and a section that does not include the data group (also referred to as a burst-off section).
  • a burst-on section is configured of a plurality of fields, wherein one field includes one data group.
  • the transmission parameter may also include information on how signals of a symbol domain are encoded in order to transmit the mobile service data, and multiplexing information on how the main service data and the mobile service data or various types of mobile service data are multiplexed.
  • the information included in the transmission parameter is merely exemplary to facilitate the understanding of the present invention. And, the adding and deleting of the information included in the transmission parameter may be easily modified and changed by anyone skilled in the art. Therefore, the present invention is not limited to the examples proposed in the description set forth herein.
  • the transmission parameters may be provided from the service multiplexer 100 to the transmitter 200. Alternatively, the transmission parameters may also be set up by an internal controller (not shown) within the transmitter 200 or received from an external source.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates a block diagram showing an example of the transmitter 200 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the transmitter 200 includes a demultiplexer 210, a packet jitter mitigator 220, a pre-processor 230, a packet multiplexer 240, a post-processor 250, a synchronization (sync) multiplexer 260, and a transmission unit 270.
  • the demultiplexer 210 should identify whether the received data packet corresponds to a main service data packet, a mobile service data packet, or a null data packet.
  • the demultiplexer 210 uses the PID within the received data packet so as to identify the main service data packet and the mobile service data packet. Then, the demultiplexer 210 uses a transport_error_indicator field to identify the null data packet.
  • the main service data packet identified by the demultiplexer 210 is outputted to the packet jitter mitigator 220, the mobile service data packet is outputted to the pre-processor 230, and the null data packet is discarded. If a transmission parameter is included in the null data packet, then the transmission parameter is first extracted and outputted to the corresponding block. Thereafter, the null data packet is discarded.
  • the pre-processor 230 performs an additional encoding process of the mobile service data included in the service data packet, which is demultiplexed and outputted from the demultiplexer 210.
  • the pre-processor 230 also performs a process of configuring a data group so that the data group may be positioned at a specific place in accordance with the purpose of the data, which are to be transmitted on a transmission frame. This is to enable the mobile service data to respond swiftly and strongly against noise and channel changes.
  • the pre-processor 230 may also refer to the transmission parameter when performing the additional encoding process.
  • the pre-processor 230 groups a plurality of mobile service data packets to configure a data group. Thereafter, known data, mobile service data, RS parity data, and MPEG header are allocated to predetermined areas within the data group.
  • FIG. 4 illustrates a block diagram showing an example of the pre-processor 230 according to the present invention.
  • the pre-processor 230 includes a data randomizer 301, a RS frame encoder 302, a block processor 303, a group formatter 304, a data deinterleaver 305, a packet formatter 306.
  • the data randomizer 301 within the above- described pre-processor 230 randomizes the mobile service data packet including the mobile service data that is inputted through the demultiplexer 210. Then, the data randomizer 301 outputs the randomized mobile service data packet to the RS frame encoder 302.
  • the data randomizer 301 since the data randomizer 301 performs the randomizing process on the mobile service data, the randomizing process that is to be performed by the data randomizer 251 of the post-processor 250 on the mobile service data may be omitted.
  • the data randomizer 301 may also discard the synchronization byte within the mobile service data packet and perform the randomizing process. This is an option that may be chosen by the system designer. In the example given in the present invention, the randomizing process is performed without discarding the synchronization byte within the mobile service data packet.
  • the RS frame encoder 302 groups a plurality of mobile the synchronization byte within the mobile service data packets that is randomized and inputted, so as to create a RS frame.
  • the RS frame encoder 302 performs at least one of an error correction encoding process and an error detection encoding process in RS frame units. Accordingly, robustness may be provided to the mobile service data, thereby scattering group error that may occur during changes in a frequency environment, thereby enabling the enhanced data to respond to the frequency environment, which is extremely vulnerable and liable to frequent changes. Also, the RS frame encoder 302 groups a plurality of RS frame so as to create a super frame, thereby performing a row permutation process in super frame units.
  • the row permutation process may also be referred to as a row interleaving process. Hereinafter, the process will be referred to as row permutation for simplicity.
  • the RS frame encoder 302 performs the process of permuting each row of the super frame in accordance with a pre-determined rule, the position of the rows within the super frame before and after the row permutation process is changed. If the row permutation process is performed by super frame units, and even though the section having a plurality of errors occurring therein becomes very long, and even though the number of errors included in the RS frame, which is to be decoded, exceeds the extent of being able to be corrected, the errors become dispersed within the entire super frame. Thus, the decoding ability is even more enhanced as compared to a single RS frame.
  • RS-encoding is applied for the error correction encoding process
  • a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) encoding is applied for the error detection process.
  • parity data that are used for the error correction are generated.
  • CRC data that are used for the error detection are generated.
  • the RS encoding is one of forward error correction (FEC) methods.
  • the FEC corresponds to a technique for compensating errors that occur during the transmission process.
  • the CRC data generated by CRC encoding may be used for indicating whether or not the mobile service data have been damaged by the errors while being transmitted through the channel.
  • the RS frame encoder 302 refers to a pre-determined transmission parameter and/or the transmission parameter provided from the service multiplexer 100 so as to perform operations including RS frame configuration, RS encoding, CRC encoding, super frame configuration, and row permutation in super frame units.
  • FIG. 5(a) to FIG. 5(e) illustrate error correction encoding and error detection encoding processed according to an embodiment of the present invention. More specifically, the RS frame encoder 302 first divides the inputted mobile service data bytes to units of a predetermined length.
  • the predetermined length is decided by the system designer. And, in the example of the present invention, the predetermined length is equal to 187 bytes, and, therefore, the 187-byte unit will be referred to as a packet for simplicity.
  • the mobile service data that are being inputted as shown in FIG. 5(a) correspond to a MPEG transport packet stream configured of 188-byte units
  • the first synchronization byte is removed, as shown in FIG. 5(b), so as to configure a 187-byte unit.
  • the synchronization byte is removed because each mobile service data packet has the same value.
  • the process of removing the synchronization byte may be performed during a randomizing process of the data randomizer 301 in an earlier process.
  • the process of the removing the synchronization byte by the RS frame encoder 302 may be omitted.
  • the process may be performed by the data derandomizer instead of the RS frame decoder.
  • a removable fixed byte e.g., synchronization byte
  • the mobile service data that are being inputted are divided into 187-byte units, thereby configuring a packet for each 187-byte unit.
  • N number of packets configured of 187 bytes is grouped to configure a RS frame.
  • the RS frame is configured as a RS frame having the size of N(row)*187(column) bytes, in which 187-byte packets are sequentially inputted in a row direction.
  • the RS frame configured as described above will also be referred to as a first RS frame. More specifically, only pure mobile service data are included in the first RS frame, which is the same as the structure configured of 187 N-byte rows. Thereafter, the mobile service data within the RS frame are divided into an equal size.
  • the receiving system uses a RS erasure decoding method when performing error correction decoding, thereby enhancing the error correction ability.
  • the N number of columns within the N number of RS frame includes 187 bytes, as shown in FIG. 5(c).
  • P is equal to 48
  • (235,187)-RS encoding process is performed so as to create a column of 235 bytes.
  • a RS frame having the size of N(row)*(187+P)(column) bytes may be created, as shown in FIG. 5(d).
  • the RS frame having the RS parity inserted therein will be referred to as s second RS frame. More specifically, the second RS frame having the structure of (187+P) rows configured of N bytes may be configured.
  • each row of the RS frame is configured of N bytes. However, depending upon channel conditions between the transmitting system and the receiving system, error may be included in the RS frame. When errors occur as described above, CRC data (or CRC code or CRC checksum) may be used on each row unit in order to verify whether error exists in each row unit.
  • the RS frame encoder 302 may perform CRC encoding on the mobile service data being RS encoded so as to create (or generate) the CRC data. The CRC data being generated by CRC encoding may be used to indicate whether the mobile service data have been damaged while being transmitted through the channel.
  • the present invention may also use different error detection encoding methods other than the CRC encoding method.
  • the present invention may use the error correction encoding method to enhance the overall error correction ability of the receiving system.
  • FIG. 5(e) illustrates an example of using a 2-byte (i.e., 16-bit) CRC checksum as the CRC data.
  • a 2-byte CRC checksum is generated for N number of bytes of each row, thereby adding the 2-byte CRC checksum at the end of the N number of bytes.
  • each row is expanded to (N+2) number of bytes.
  • Equation 1 below corresponds to an exemplary equation for generating a 2-byte CRC checksum for each row being configured of N number of bytes.
  • the process of adding a 2-byte checksum in each row is only exemplary. Therefore, the present invention is not limited only to the example proposed in the description set forth herein.
  • the RS frame having the RS parity and CRC checksum added therein will hereinafter be referred to as a third RS frame. More specifically, the third RS frame corresponds to (187+P) number of rows each configured of (N+2) number of bytes.
  • the (N*187)-byte RS frame is expanded to a (N+2)*(187+P)-byte RS frame.
  • the RS frame that is expanded, as shown in FIG. 5(e) is inputted to the block processor 303.
  • the mobile service data encoded by the RS frame encoder 302 are inputted to the block processor 303.
  • the block processor 303 then encodes the inputted mobile service data at a coding rate of G/H (wherein, G is smaller than H (i.e., G ⁇ H)) and then outputted to the group formatter 304. More specifically, the block processor 303 divides the mobile service data being inputted in byte units into bit units. Then, the G number of bits is encoded to H number of bits. Thereafter, the encoded bits are converted back to byte units and then outputted.
  • the former coding rate will be referred to as a coding rate of 1/2 (1/2-rate coding), and the latter coding rate will be referred to as a coding rate of 1/4 (1/4-rate coding), for simplicity.
  • the block processor 303 may also receive signaling information including transmission parameters.
  • the signaling information may also be processed with either 1/2-rate coding or 1/4-rate coding as in the step of processing mobile service data. Thereafter, the signaling information is also considered the same as the mobile service data and processed accordingly.
  • the group formatter inserts mobile service data that are outputted from the block processor 303 in corresponding areas within a data group, which is configured in accordance with a pre-defined rule. Also, with respect to the data dein- terleaving process, each place holder or known data (or known data place holders) are also inserted in corresponding areas within the data group.
  • the data group may be divided into at least one hierarchical area.
  • the type of mobile service data being inserted in each area may vary depending upon the characteristics of each hierarchical area. Additionally, each area may, for example, be divided based upon the receiving performance within the data group.
  • one data group may be configured to include a set of field synchronization data.
  • a data group is divided into A, B, and C regions in a data configuration prior to data deinterleaving.
  • the group formatter 304 allocates the mobile service data, which are inputted after being RS encoded and block encoded, to each of the corresponding regions by referring to the transmission parameter.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates an alignment of data after being data interleaved and identified
  • FIG. 7 illustrates an alignment of data before being data interleaved and identified. More specifically, a data structure identical to that shown in FIG. 6 is transmitted to a receiving system. Also, the data group configured to have the same structure as the data structure shown in FIG. 6 is inputted to the data dein- terleaver 305.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a data structure prior to data deinterleaving that is divided into 3 regions, such as region A, region B, and region C. Also, in the present invention, each of the regions A to C is further divided into a plurality of regions. Referring to FIG. 6, region A is divided into 5 regions (Al to A5), region B is divided into 2 regions (Bl and B2), and region C is divided into 3 regions (Cl to C3).
  • regions A to C are identified as regions having similar receiving performances within the data group.
  • the type of mobile service data, which are inputted may also vary depending upon the characteristic of each region.
  • the data structure is divided into regions A to C based upon the level of interference of the main service data.
  • the data group is divided into a plurality of regions to be used for different purposes. More specifically, a region of the main service data having no interference or a very low interference level may be considered to have a more resistant (or stronger) receiving performance as compared to regions having higher interference levels.
  • the known data having a predetermined length may be periodically inserted in the region having no interference from the main service data (e.g., region A).
  • it is difficult to periodically insert known data and also to insert consecutively long known data to a region having interference from the main service data e.g., region B and region C).
  • region A Al to A5
  • region B region B
  • region C region C
  • the data group size, the number of hierarchically divided regions within the data group and the size of each region, and the number of mobile service data bytes that can be inserted in each hierarchically divided region of FIG. 6 are merely examples given to facilitate the understanding of the present invention.
  • the group formatter 304 creates a data group including places in which field synchronization data bytes are to be inserted, so as to create the data group that will hereinafter be described in detail.
  • region A is a region within the data group in which a long known data sequence may be periodically inserted, and in which includes regions wherein the main service data are not mixed (e.g., Al to A5). Also, region A includes a region (e.g., Al) located between a field synchronization region and the region in which the first known data sequence is to be inserted.
  • the field synchronization region has the length of one segment (i.e., 832 symbols) existing in an ATSC system.
  • 2428 bytes of the mobile service data may be inserted in region Al, 2580 bytes may be inserted in region A2, 2772 bytes may be inserted in region A3, 2472 bytes may be inserted in region A4, and 2772 bytes may be inserted in region A5.
  • trellis initialization data or known data, MPEG header, and RS parity are not included in the mobile service data.
  • region A includes a known data sequence at both ends, the receiving system uses channel information that can obtain known data or field synchronization data, so as to perform equalization, thereby providing enforced equalization performance.
  • region B includes a region located within 8 segments at the beginning of a field synchronization region within the data group (chronologically placed before region Al) (e.g., region Bl), and a region located within 8 segments behind the very last known data sequence which is inserted in the data group (e.g., region B2). For example, 930 bytes of the mobile service data may be inserted in the region Bl, and 1350 bytes may be inserted in region B2. Similarly, trellis initialization data or known data, MPEG header, and RS parity are not included in the mobile service data.
  • the receiving system may perform equalization by using channel information obtained from the field synchronization region. Alternatively, the receiving system may also perform equalization by using channel information that may be obtained from the last known data sequence, thereby enabling the system to respond to the channel changes.
  • Region C includes a region located within 30 segments including and preceding the 9 th segment of the field synchronization region (chronologically located before region A) (e.g., region Cl), a region located within 12 segments including and following the 9 th segment of the very last known data sequence within the data group (chronologically located after region A) (e.g., region C2), and a region located in 32 segments after the region C2 (e.g., region C3).
  • 1272 bytes of the mobile service data may be inserted in the region Cl
  • 1560 bytes may be inserted in region C2
  • 1312 bytes may be inserted in region C3.
  • region C (e.g., region Cl) is located chronologically earlier than (or before) region A.
  • region C e.g., region Cl
  • the receiving system may use the channel information obtained from the field synchronization data when performing channel equalization. Alternatively, the receiving system may also use the most recent channel information of a previous data group.
  • region C e.g., region C2 and region C3 located before region A
  • the receiving system may use the channel information obtained from the last known data sequence to perform equalization.
  • the equalization may not be performed perfectly. Therefore, the equalization performance of region C may be deteriorated as compared to that of region B.
  • the block processor 303 may encode the mobile service data, which are to be inserted to each region based upon the characteristic of each hierarchical region, at a different coding rate. For example, the block processor 303 may encode the mobile service data, which are to be inserted in regions Al to A5 of region A, at a coding rate of 1/2. Then, the group formatter 304 may insert the 1/2-rate encoded mobile service data to regions Al to A5.
  • the block processor 303 may encode the mobile service data, which are to be inserted in regions B 1 and B2 of region B, at a coding rate of 1/4 having higher error correction ability as compared to the 1/2-coding rate. Then, the group formatter 304 inserts the 1/4-rate coded mobile service data in region B 1 and region B2. Furthermore, the block processor 303 may encode the mobile service data, which are to be inserted in regions Cl to C3 of region C, at a coding rate of 1/4 or a coding rate having higher error correction ability than the 1/4-coding rate. Then, the group formatter 304 may either insert the encoded mobile service data to regions Cl to C3, as described above, or leave the data in a reserved region for future usage.
  • the group formatter 304 also inserts supplemental data, such as signaling information that notifies the overall transmission information, other than the mobile service data in the data group. Also, apart from the encoded mobile service data outputted from the block processor 303, the group formatter 304 also inserts MPEG header place holders, non-systematic RS parity place holders, main service data place holders, which are related to data deinterleaving in a later process, as shown in FIG. 6.
  • the main service data place holders are inserted because the mobile service data bytes and the main service data bytes are alternately mixed with one another in regions B and C based upon the input of the data deinterleaver, as shown in FIG. 6. For example, based upon the data outputted after data deinterleaving, the place holder for the MPEG header may be allocated at the very beginning of each packet.
  • the group formatter 304 either inserts known data generated in ac- cordance with a pre-determined method or inserts known data place holders for inserting the known data in a later process. Additionally, place holders for initializing the trellis encoding module 256 are also inserted in the corresponding regions. For example, the initialization data place holders may be inserted in the beginning of the known data sequence.
  • the size of the mobile service data that can be inserted in a data group may vary in accordance with the sizes of the trellis initialization place holders or known data (or known data place holders), MPEG header place holders, and RS parity place holders.
  • the output of the group formatter 304 is inputted to the data deinterleaver 305.
  • the data deinterleaver 305 deinterleaves data by performing an inverse process of the data interleaver on the data and place holders within the data group, which are then outputted to the packet formatter 306. More specifically, when the data and place holders within the data group configured, as shown in FIG. 6, are deinterleaved by the data deinterleaver 305, the data group being outputted to the packet formatter 306 is configured to have the structure shown in FIG. 7.
  • the packet formatter 306 removes the main service data place holders and the RS parity place holders that were allocated for the deinterleaving process from the deinterleaved data being inputted. Then, the packet formatter 306 groups the remaining portion and replaces the 4-byte MPEG header place holder with an MPEG header having a null packet PID (or an unused PID from the main service data packet). Also, when the group formatter 304 inserts known data place holders, the packet formatter 306 may insert actual known data in the known data place holders, or may directly output the known data place holders without any modification in order to make replacement insertion in a later process.
  • the packet formatter 306 identifies the data within the packet- formatted data group, as described above, as a 188-byte unit mobile service data packet (i.e., MPEG TS packet), which is then provided to the packet multiplexer 240.
  • MPEG TS packet a 188-byte unit mobile service data packet
  • the packet multiplexer 240 multiplexes the mobile service data packet outputted from the pre-processor 230 and the main service data packet outputted from the packet jitter mitigator 220 in accordance with a pre-defined multiplexing method. Then, the packet multiplexer 240 outputs the multiplexed data packets to the data randomizer 251 of the post-processor 250.
  • the multiplexing method may vary in accordance with various variables of the system design.
  • One of the multiplexing methods of the packet formatter 240 consists of providing a burst section along a time axis, and, then, transmitting a plurality of data groups during a burst-on section within the burst section, and transmitting only the main service data during the burst-off section within the burst section.
  • the burst section indicates the section starting from the beginning of the current burst until the beginning of the next burst. [115] At this point, the main service data may be transmitted during the burst-on section.
  • the packet multiplexer 240 refers to the transmission parameter, such as information on the burst size or the burst period, so as to be informed of the number of data groups and the period of the data groups included in a single burst.
  • the mobile service data and the main service data may co-exist in the burst-on section, and only the main service data may exist in the burst-off section. Therefore, a main data service section transmitting the main service data may exist in both burst-on and burst-off sections. At this point, the main data service section within the burst-on section and the number of main data service packets included in the burst-off section may either be different from one another or be the same.
  • the N value corresponding to the length of a row, which is included in the RS frame that is configured by the RS frame encoder 302, is set to 538.
  • the RS frame encoder 302 receives 538 transport stream (TS) packets so as to configure a first RS frame having the size of 538*187 bytes.
  • TS transport stream
  • the first RS frame is processed with a (235,187)-RS encoding process so as to configure a second RS frame having the size of 538*235 bytes.
  • the second RS frame is processed with generating a 16-bit checksum so as to configure a third RS frame having the sizes of 540*235.
  • the block processor 303 when 7082 bytes of mobile service data are inputted to the block processor 303, 6512 byte are expanded to 13024 bytes by being 1/2-rate encoded, and 570 bytes are expanded to 2280 bytes by being 1/4-rate encoded. Thereafter, the block processor 303 inserts the mobile service data expanded to 13024 bytes in regions Al to A5 of region A and, also, inserts the mobile service data expanded to 2280 bytes in regions B 1 and B2 of region B.
  • the 7082 bytes of mobile service data being inputted to the block processor 303 may be divided into an output of the RS frame encoder 302 and signaling information.
  • 7050 bytes correspond to the output of the RS frame encoder 302, and the remaining 32 bytes correspond to the signaling information data. Then, 1/2-rate encoding or 1/4-rate encoding is performed on the corresponding data bytes.
  • a RS frame being processed with RS encoding and CRC encoding from the RS frame encoder 302 is configured of 540*235 bytes, in other words, 126900 bytes.
  • the 126900 bytes are divided by 7050-byte units along the time axis, so as to produce 18 7050-byte units.
  • a 32-byte unit of signaling information data is added to the 7050-byte unit mobile service data being outputted from the RS frame encoder 302.
  • the RS frame encoder 302 performs 1/2-rate encoding or 1/4-rate encoding on the corresponding data bytes, which are then outputted to the group formatter 304. Accordingly, the group formatter 304 inserts the 1/2-rate encoded data in region A and the 1/4-rate encoded data in region B.
  • the size of the final RS frame i.e., the third RS frame
  • CRC encoded from the RS frame encoder 302 which corresponds to (N+2)*235 bytes
  • X is an integer.
  • the value of N is decided so that (N+2) becomes a multiple of 30.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates a process of dividing the RS frame according to the present invention. More specifically, the RS frame having the size of (N+2)*235 is divided into 30*235 byte blocks. Then, the divided blocks are mapped to a single group. In other words, the data of a block having the size of 30*235 bytes are processed with one of a 1/2-rate encoding process and a 1/4-rate encoding process and are, then, inserted in a data group. Thereafter, the data group having corresponding data and place holders inserted in each hierarchical region divided by the group formatter 304 passes through the data deinterleaver 305 and the packet formatter 306 so as to be inputted to the packet multiplexer 240.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates exemplary operations of a packet multiplexer for transmitting the data group according to the present invention. More specifically, the packet multiplexer 240 multiplexes a field including a data group, in which the mobile service data and main service data are mixed with one another, and a field including only the main service data. Thereafter, the packet multiplexer 240 outputs the multiplexed fields to the data randomizer 251.
  • the packet multiplexer 240 outputs the multiplexed fields to the data randomizer 251.
  • 18 data groups should be transmitted.
  • each data group includes field synchronization data, as shown in FIG. 6. Therefore, the 18 data groups are transmitted during 18 field sections, and the section during which the 18 data groups are being transmitted corresponds to the burst-on section.
  • a data group including field synchronization data is multiplexed with main service data, which are then outputted.
  • main service data For example, in the embodiment of the present invention, in each field within the burst-on section, a data group having the size of 118 segments is multiplexed with a set of main service data having the size of 194 segments.
  • a field including 18 data groups is transmitted.
  • a field consisting only of the main service data is transmitted.
  • 18 fields including 18 data groups are transmitted.
  • 12 fields consisting only of the main service data are transmitted.
  • the same type of data service may be provided in the first burst-on section including the first 18 data groups and in the second burst- on section including the next 18 data groups.
  • different types of data service may be provided in each burst-on section. For example, when it is assumed that different data service types are provided to each of the first burst-on section and the second burst-on section, and that the receiving system wishes to receive only one type of data service, the receiving system turns the power on only during the corresponding burst-on section including the desired data service type so as to receive the corresponding 18 data fields. Then, the receiving system turns the power off during the remaining 42 field sections so as to prevent other data service types from being received.
  • the receiving system according to the present invention is advantageous in that one RS frame may be configured from the 18 data groups that are received during a single burst-on section.
  • the number of data groups included in a burst-on section may vary based upon the size of the RS frame, and the size of the RS frame varies in accordance with the value N. More specifically, by adjusting the value N, the number of data groups within the burst section may be adjusted.
  • the (235,187)-RS encoding process adjusts the value N during a fixed state.
  • the size of the mobile service data that can be inserted in the data group may vary based upon the sizes of the trellis initialization data or known data, the MPEG header, and the RS parity, which are inserted in the corresponding data group.
  • the packet jitter generated from the packet multiplexer 240 does not cause any serious problem in case of the video data.
  • the size of the buffer for the audio data is relatively small, the packet jitter may cause considerable problem. More specifically, due to the packet jitter, an overflow or underflow may occur in the buffer for the main service data of the receiving system (e.g., the buffer for the audio data). Therefore, the packet jitter mitigator 220 re-adjusts the relative position of the main service data packet so that the overflow or underflow does not occur in the system object decoder.
  • the packet jitter mitigator 220 repositions the audio data packets in the main service data section so that the audio data packets of the main service data can be as equally and uniformly aligned and positioned as possible.
  • the standard for repositioning the audio data packets in the main service data performed by the packet jitter mitigator 220 will now be described.
  • the packet jitter mitigator 220 knows the same multiplexing information as that of the packet multiplexer 240, which is placed further behind the packet jitter mitigator 220.
  • the audio data packet is positioned at the very beginning of the main service data section.
  • the main service data section e.g., the main service data section positioned between two data groups
  • the audio data packet is positioned at the very beginning of the main service data section.
  • the audio data packet is placed at the very beginning of the main service data section.
  • the audio data packet is placed at the very end of the corresponding section.
  • the audio data packet is positioned at the very end of the main service data section.
  • the data packets other than audio data packets are positioned in accordance with the inputted order in vacant spaces (i.e., spaces that are not designated for the audio data packets).
  • associated program clock reference (PCR) values may also be modified accordingly.
  • the PCR value corresponds to a time reference value for synchronizing the time of the MPEG decoder.
  • the PCR value is inserted in a specific region of a TS packet and then transmitted.
  • the packet jitter mitigator 220 also performs the operation of modifying the PCR value.
  • the output of the packet jitter mitigator 220 is inputted to the packet multiplexer 240.
  • the packet multiplexer 240 multiplexes the main service data packet outputted from the packet jitter mitigator 220 with the mobile service data packet outputted from the pre-processor 230 into a burst structure in accordance with a pre-determined multiplexing rule. Then, the packet multiplexer 240 outputs the multiplexed data packets to the data randomizer 251 of the post-processor 250.
  • the data randomizer 251 performs the same randomizing process as that of the conventional randomizer. More specifically, the synchronization byte within the main service data packet is deleted. Then, the remaining 187 data bytes are randomized by using a pseudo random byte generated from the data randomizer 251. Thereafter, the randomized data are outputted to the RS encoder/non- systematic RS encoder 252.
  • the data randomizer 251 may randomize only a portion of the data packet. For example, if it is assumed that a randomizing process has already been performed in advance on the mobile service data packet by the pre-processor 230, the data randomizer 251 deletes the synchronization byte from the 4-byte MPEG header included in the mobile service data packet and, then, performs the randomizing process only on the remaining 3 data bytes of the MPEG header. Thereafter, the randomized data bytes are outputted to the RS encoder/non-systematic RS encoder 252. More specifically, the randomizing process is not performed on the remaining portion of the mobile service data excluding the MPEG header.
  • the remaining portion of the mobile service data packet is directly outputted to the RS encoder/ non-systematic RS encoder 252 without being randomized.
  • the data randomizer 251 may or may not perform a randomizing process on the known data (or known data place holders) and the initialization data place holders included in the mobile service data packet.
  • the RS encoder/non-systematic RS encoder 252 performs an RS encoding process on the data being randomized by the data randomizer 251 or on the data bypassing the data randomizer 251, so as to add 20 bytes of RS parity data. Thereafter, the processed data are outputted to the data interleaver 253.
  • the RS encoder/non- systematic RS encoder 252 performs the same systematic RS encoding process as that of the conventional broadcasting system, thereby adding the 20-byte RS parity data at the end of the 187-byte data.
  • the RS encoder/non-systematic RS encoder 252 performs a non- systematic RS encoding process.
  • the 20-byte RS parity data obtained from the non- systematic RS encoding process are inserted in a pre-decided parity byte place within the mobile service data packet.
  • the data interleaver 253 corresponds to a byte unit convolutional interleaver.
  • the output of the data interleaver 253 is inputted to the parity replacer 254 and to the non- systematic RS encoder 255.
  • a process of initializing a memory within the trellis encoding module 256 is primarily required in order to decide the output data of the trellis encoding module 256, which is located after the parity replacer 254, as the known data pre-defined according to an agreement between the receiving system and the transmitting system. More specifically, the memory of the trellis encoding module 256 should first be initialized before the received known data sequence is trellis- encoded.
  • the beginning portion of the known data sequence that is received corresponds to the initialization data place holder and not to the actual known data.
  • the initialization data place holder has been included in the data by the group formatter within the pre-processor 230 in an earlier process. Therefore, the process of generating initialization data and replacing the initialization data place holder of the corresponding memory with the generated initialization data are required to be performed immediately before the inputted known data sequence is trellis- encoded.
  • a value of the trellis memory initialization data is decided and generated based upon a memory status of the trellis encoding module 256. Further, due to the newly replaced initialization data, a process of newly calculating the RS parity and replacing the RS parity, which is outputted from the data interleaver 253, with the newly calculated RS parity is required. Therefore, the non-systematic RS encoder 255 receives the mobile service data packet including the initialization data place holders, which are to be replaced with the actual initialization data, from the data interleaver 253 and also receives the initialization data from the trellis encoding module 256.
  • the initialization data place holders are replaced with the initialization data, and the RS parity data that are added to the mobile service data packet are removed and processed with non-systematic RS encoding. Thereafter, the new RS parity obtained by performing the non-systematic RS encoding process is outputted to the parity replacer 255. Accordingly, the parity replacer 255 selects the output of the data interleaver 253 as the data within the mobile service data packet, and the parity replacer 255 selects the output of the non-systematic RS encoder 255 as the RS parity. The selected data are then outputted to the trellis encoding module 256.
  • the parity replacer 254 selects the data and RS parity that are outputted from the data interleaver 253. Then, the parity replacer 254 directly outputs the selected data to the trellis encoding module 256 without any modification.
  • the trellis encoding module 256 converts the byte-unit data to symbol units and performs a 12-way interleaving process so as to trellis -encode the received data. Thereafter, the processed data are outputted to the synchronization multiplexer 260.
  • the synchronization multiplexer 260 inserts a field synchronization signal and a segment synchronization signal to the data outputted from the trellis encoding module 256 and, then, outputs the processed data to the pilot inserter 271 of the transmission unit 270.
  • the data having a pilot inserted therein by the pilot inserter 271 are modulated by the modulator 272 in accordance with a pre-determined modulating method (e.g., a VSB method). Thereafter, the modulated data are transmitted to each receiving system though the radio frequency (RF) up-converter 273.
  • RF radio frequency
  • FIG. 10 illustrates a block diagram showing a structure of a block processor according to the present invention.
  • the block processor includes a byte-bit converter 401, a symbol encoder 402, a symbol interleaver 403, and a symbol-byte converter 404.
  • the byte-bit converter 401 divides the mobile service data bytes that are inputted from the RS frame encoder 112 into bits, which are then outputted to the symbol encoder 402.
  • the byte-bit converter 401 may also receive signaling information including transmission parameters.
  • the signaling information data bytes are also divided into bits so as to be outputted to the symbol encoder 402.
  • the signaling information including transmission parameters may be processed with the same data processing step as that of the mobile service data.
  • the signaling information may be inputted to the block processor 303 by passing through the data randomizer 301 and the RS frame encoder 302.
  • the signaling information may also be directly outputted to the block processor 303 without passing though the data randomizer 301 and the RS frame encoder 302.
  • the symbol encoder 402 corresponds to a G/H-rate encoder encoding the inputted data from G bits to H bits and outputting the data encoded at the coding rate of G/H. According to the embodiment of the present invention, it is assumed that the symbol encoder 402 performs either a coding rate of 1/2 (also referred to as a 1/2-rate encoding process) or an encoding process at a coding rate of 1/4 (also referred to as a 1/4-rate encoding process). The symbol encoder 402 performs one of 1/2-rate encoding and 1/4-rate encoding on the inputted mobile service data and signaling information. Thereafter, the signaling information is also recognized as the mobile service data and processed accordingly.
  • the symbol encoder 402 receives 1 bit and encodes the received 1 bit to 2 bits (i.e., 1 symbol). Then, the symbol encoder 402 outputs the processed 2 bits (or 1 symbol). On the other hand, in case of performing the 1/4-rate encoding process, the symbol encoder 402 receives 1 bit and encodes the received 1 bit to 4 bits (i.e., 2 symbols). Then, the symbol encoder 402 outputs the processed 4 bits (or 2 symbols).
  • FIG. 11 illustrates a detailed block diagram of the symbol encoder 402 shown in FIG. 10.
  • the symbol encoder 402 includes two delay units 501 and 503 and three adders 502, 504, and 505.
  • the symbol encoder 402 encodes an input data bit U and outputs the coded bit U to 4 bits (u ⁇ to u4).
  • the data bit U is directly outputted as uppermost bit u0 and simultaneously encoded as lower bit ulu2u3 and then outputted. More specifically, the input data bit U is directly outputted as the uppermost bit u0 and simultaneously outputted to the first and third adders 502 and 505.
  • the first adder 502 adds the input data bit U and the output bit of the first delay unit 501 and, then, outputs the added bit to the second delay unit 503. Then, the data bit delayed by a pre-determined time (e.g., by 1 clock) in the second delay unit 503 is outputted as lower bit ul and simultaneously fed-back to the first delay unit 501.
  • the first delay unit 501 delays the data bit fed-back from the second delay unit 503 by a pre-determined time (e.g., by 1 clock). Then, the first delay unit 501 outputs the delayed data bit to the first adder 502 and the second adder 504.
  • the second adder 504 adds the data bits outputted from the first and second delay units 501 and 503 as a lower bit u2.
  • the third adder 505 adds the input data bit U and the output of the second delay unit 503 and outputs the added data bit as a lower bit u3.
  • the symbol encoder 402 configures a symbol with uluO bits from the 4 output bits u ⁇ ulu2u3. Then, the symbol encoder 402 outputs the newly configured symbol.
  • the symbol encoder 402 configures and outputs a symbol with bits uluO and, then, configures and outputs another symbol with bits u2u3.
  • the symbol encoder 402 may also configure and output a symbol with bits uluO, and then repeat the process once again and output the corresponding bits.
  • the symbol encoder outputs all four output bits U u ⁇ ulu2u3. Then, when using the 1/2-coding rate, the symbol interleaver 403 located behind the symbol encoder 402 selects only the symbol configured of bits uluO from the four output bits u ⁇ ulu2u3. Alternatively, when using the 1/4-coding rate, the symbol interleaver 403 may select the symbol configured of bits uluO and then select another symbol configured of bits u2u3. According to another embodiment, when using the 1/4-coding rate, the symbol interleaver 403 may repeatedly select the symbol configured of bits uluO.
  • the symbol interleaver 403 performs block interleaving in symbol units on the data outputted from the symbol encoder 402. Any interleaver performing structural rearrangement (or realignment) may be applied as the symbol interleaver 403 of the block processor.
  • a variable length symbol interleaver that can be applied even when a plurality of lengths is provided for the symbol, so that its order may be rearranged, may also be used.
  • FIG. 12 illustrates a symbol interleaver according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the symbol interleaver according to the embodiment of the present invention corresponds to a variable length symbol interleaver that may be applied even when a plurality of lengths is provided for the symbol, so that its order may be rearranged.
  • K indicates a number of symbols that are outputted for symbol interleaving from the symbol encoder 402.
  • L represents a number of symbols that are actually interleaved by the symbol interleaver 403.
  • the symbol intereleaver 403 should satisfy the conditions of L - 2°
  • K becomes a block size of the actual symbols that are inputted to the symbol interleaver 403 in order to be interleaved.
  • L becomes an interleaving unit when the interleaving process is performed by an interleaving pattern created from the symbol interleaver 403. The example of what is described above is illustrated in FIG. 12.
  • FIG. 12(a) to FIG. 12(c) illustrate a variable length interleaving process of a symbol interleaver shown in FIG. 10.
  • 6 symbols are outputted from the symbol encoder 402 in order to be interleaved.
  • the actual interleaving unit (L) is equal to 8 symbols. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12(a), 2 symbols are added to the null (or dummy) symbol, thereby creating the interleaving pattern. Equation 2 shown below described the process of sequentially receiving K number of symbols, the order of which is to be rearranged, and obtaining an L value satisfying the conditions of
  • FIG. 12 illustrates the created interleaving pattern and an example of the interleaving process.
  • the order of K number of input symbols and (L-K) number of null symbols is rearranged by using the above- mentioned Equation 2.
  • the null byte places are removed, so as to rearrange the order, by using Equation 3 shown below.
  • the symbol that is interleaved by the rearranged order is then outputted to the symbol-byte converter.
  • the symbol-byte converter 404 converts to bytes the mobile service data symbols, having the rearranging of the symbol order completed and then outputted in accordance with the rearranged order, and thereafter outputs the converted bytes to the group formatter 304.
  • FIG. 13 illustrates a block diagram showing the structure of a block processor according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the block processor includes an interleaving unit 610 and a block formatter 620.
  • the interleaving unit 610 may include a byte-symbol converter 611, a symbol-byte converter 612, a symbol in- terleaver 613, and a symbol-byte converter 614.
  • the symbol interleaver 613 may also be referred to as a block interleaver.
  • the symbol-byte converter 612 groups 4 symbols outputted from the byte-symbol converter 611 so as to configure a byte. Thereafter, the converted data bytes are outputted to the block formatter 620.
  • each of the symbol-byte converter 612 and the byte-symbol converter 611 respectively performs an inverse process on one another. Therefore, the yield of these two blocks is offset. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 14, the input data X bypass the byte-symbol converter 611 and the symbol-byte converter 612 and are directly inputted to the block formatter 620.
  • the interleaving unit 610 of FIG. 14 has a structure equivalent to that of the interleaving unit shown in FIG. 13. Therefore, the same reference numerals will be used in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14.
  • the symbol interleaver 613 performs block interleaving in symbol units on the data that are outputted from the byte-symbol converter 611. Subsequently, the symbol interleaver 613 outputs the interleaved data to the symbol-byte converter 614.
  • any type of interleaver that can rearrange the structural order may be used as the symbol interleaver 613 of the present invention.
  • a variable length interleaver that may be applied for symbols having a wide range of lengths, the order of which is to be rearranged.
  • the symbol interleaver of FIG. 12 may also be used in the block processor shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14.
  • the symbol-byte converter 614 outputs the symbols having the rearranging of the symbol order completed, in accordance with the rearranged order. Thereafter, the symbols are grouped to be configured in byte units, which are then outputted to the block formatter 620. More specifically, the symbol-byte converter 614 groups 4 symbols outputted from the symbol interleaver 613 so as to configure a data byte. As shown in FIG. 15, the block formatter 620 performs the process of aligning the output of each symbol-byte converter 612 and 614 within the block in accordance with a set standard. Herein, the block formatter 620 operates in association with the trellis encoding module 256.
  • the block formatter 620 decides the output order of the mobile service data outputted from each symbol-byte converter 612 and 614 while taking into consideration the place (or order) of the data excluding the mobile service data that are being inputted, wherein the mobile service data include main service data, known data, RS parity data, and MPEG header data.
  • the trellis encoding module 256 is provided with 12 trellis encoders.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates a block diagram showing the trellis encoding module 256 according to the present invention.
  • 12 identical trellis encoders are combined to the interleaver in order to disperse noise.
  • each trellis encoder may be provided with a pre-coder.
  • FIG. 17 illustrates the block processor 303 being concatenated with the trellis encoding module 256.
  • a plurality of blocks actually exists between the pre-processor 230 including the block processor 303 and the trellis encoding module 256, as shown in FIG. 3.
  • the receiving system considers the pre-processor 230 to be concatenated with the trellis encoding module 256, thereby performing the decoding process accordingly.
  • the data excluding the mobile service data that are being inputted to the trellis encoding module 256 correspond to data that are added to the blocks existing between the block processor 303 and the trellis encoding module 256.
  • FIG. 18 illustrates an example of a data processor 650 being positioned between the block processor 303 and the trellis encoding module 256, while taking the above-described instance into consideration.
  • the interleaving unit 610 of the block processor 303 may be configured as shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 14).
  • the data processor 650 may include a group formatter 304, a data deinterleaver 305, a packet formatter 306, a packet multiplexer 240, and a post-processor 250, wherein the post-processor 250 includes a data randomizer 251, a RS encoder/non-systematic RS encoder 252, a data interleaver 253, a parity replacer 254, and a non-systematic RS encoder 255.
  • the trellis encoding module 256 symbolizes the data that are being inputted so as to divide the symbolized data and to send the divided data to each trellis encoder in accordance with a pre-defined method.
  • one byte is converted into 4 symbols, each being configured of 2 bits.
  • the symbols created from the single data byte are all transmitted to the same trellis encoder.
  • each trellis encoder pre-codes an upper bit of the input symbol, which is then outputted as the uppermost output bit C2.
  • each trellis encoder trellis -encodes a lower bit of the input symbol, which is then outputted as two output bits Cl and CO.
  • the block formatter 620 is controlled so that the data byte outputted from each symbol-byte converter can be transmitted to different trellis encoders.
  • the operation of the block formatter 620 will now be described in detail with reference to FIG. 10 to FIG. 12.
  • the data byte outputted from the symbol-byte converter 612 and the data byte outputted from the symbol-byte converter 614 are inputted to different trellis encoders of the trellis encoding module 256 in accordance with the control of the block formatter 620.
  • the data byte outputted from the symbol-byte converter 612 will be referred to as X
  • the data byte outputted from the symbol-byte converter 614 will be referred to as Y, for simplicity.
  • each number i.e., 0 to 11 indicates the first to twelfth trellis encoders of the trellis encoding module 256, respectively.
  • the output order of both symbol-byte converters are arranged (or aligned) so that the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 612 are respectively inputted to the 0 th to 5 th trellis encoders (0 to 5) of the trellis encoding module 256, and that the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 614 are respectively inputted to the 6 th to 11 th trellis encoders (6 to 11) of the trellis encoding module 256.
  • the trellis encoders having the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 612 allocated therein, and the trellis encoders having the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 614 allocated therein are merely examples given to simplify the understanding of the present invention. Furthermore, according to an embodiment of the present invention, and assuming that the input data of the block processor 303 correspond to a block configured of 12 bytes, the symbol-byte converter 612 outputs 12 data bytes from XO to Xl 1, and the symbol-byte converter 614 outputs 12 data bytes from YO to Yl 1.
  • FIG. 15(b) illustrates an example of data being inputted to the trellis encoding module 256.
  • FIG. 15(b) illustrates an example of not only the mobile service data but also the main service data and RS parity data being inputted to the trellis encoding module 256, so as to be distributed to each trellis encoder.
  • the mobile service data outputted from the block processor 303 pass through the group formatter 304, from which the mobile service data are mixed with the main service data and RS parity data and then outputted, as shown in FIG. 15 (a).
  • each data byte is respectively inputted to the 12 trellis encoders in accordance with the positions (or places) within the data group after being data-interleaved.
  • each trellis encoder when the output data bytes X and Y of the symbol-byte converters 612 and 614 are allocated to each respective trellis encoder, the input of each trellis encoder may be configured as shown in FIG. 15(b). More specifically, referring to FIG. 15(b), the six mobile service data bytes (XO to X5) outputted from the symbol-byte converter 612 are sequentially allocated (or distributed) to the first to sixth trellis encoders (0 to 5) of the trellis encoding module 256.
  • the 2 mobile service data bytes YO and Yl outputted from the symbol-byte converter 614 are sequentially allocated to the 7 th and 8 th trellis encoders (6 and 7) of the trellis encoding module 256. Thereafter, among the 5 main service data bytes, 4 data bytes are sequentially allocated to the 9 th and 12 th trellis encoders (8 to 11) of the trellis encoding module 256. Finally, the remaining 1 byte of the main service data byte is allocated once again to the first trellis encoder (0).
  • the mobile service data, the main service data, and the RS parity data are allocated to each trellis encoder, as shown in FIG. 15(b). It is also assumed that, as described above, the input of the block processor 303 is configured of 12 bytes, and that 12 bytes from XO to Xl 1 are outputted from the symbol-byte converter 612, and that 12 bytes from YO to Yl 1 are outputted from the symbol-byte converter 614. In this case, as shown in FIG.
  • the block formatter 620 arranges the data bytes that are to be outputted from the symbol-byte converters 612 and 614 by the order of XO to X5, YO, Yl, X6 to XlO, Y2 to Y7, Xl 1, and Y8 to Yl 1. More specifically, the trellis encoder that is to perform the encoding process is decided based upon the position (or place) within the transmission frame in which each data byte is inserted. At this point, not only the mobile service data but also the main service data, the MPEG header data, and the RS parity data are also inputted to the trellis encoding module 256.
  • the block formatter 620 is informed of (or knows) the information on the data group format after the data- interleaving process.
  • FIG. 19 illustrates a block diagram of the block processor performing an encoding process at a coding rate of 1/N according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the block processor includes (N-I) number of symbol interleavers 741 to 74N- 1, which are configured in a parallel structure. More specifically, the block processor having the coding rate of 1/N consists of a total of N number of branches (or paths) including a branch (or path), which is directly transmitted to the block formatter 730.
  • the symbol interleaver 741 to 74N- 1 of each branch may each be configured of a different symbol interleaver.
  • (N-I) number of symbol- byte converter 751 to 75N- 1 each corresponding to each (N-I) number of symbol interleavers 741 to 74N- 1 may be included at the end of each symbol interleaver, respectively.
  • the output data of the (N-I) number of symbol-byte converter 751 to 75N- 1 are also inputted to the block formatter 730.
  • N is equal to or smaller than 12. If N is equal to 12, the block formatter 730 may align the output data so that the output byte of the 12 th symbol-byte converter 75N- 1 is inputted to the 12 th trellis encoder.
  • the block formatter 730 may arranged the output order, so that the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 720 are inputted to the 1 st to 4 th trellis encoders of the trellis encoding module 256, and that the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 751 are inputted to the 5 th to 8 th trellis encoders, and that the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 752 are inputted to the 9 th to 12 th trellis encoders.
  • the order of the data bytes outputted from each symbol-byte converter may vary in accordance with the position within the data group of the data other than the mobile service data, which are mixed with the mobile service data that are outputted from each symbol-byte converter.
  • FIG. 20 illustrates a detailed block diagram showing the structure of a block processor according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the block formatter is removed from the block processor so that the operation of the block formatter may be performed by a group formatter.
  • the block processor of FIG. 20 may include a byte-symbol converter 810, symbol-byte converters 820 and 840, and a symbol interleaver 830. In this case, the output of each symbol-byte converter 820 and 840 is inputted to the group formatter 850.
  • the block processor may obtain a desired coding rate by adding symbol in- terleavers and symbol-byte converters. If the system designer wishes a coding rate of 1/N, the block processor needs to be provided with a total of N number of branches (or paths) including a branch (or path), which is directly transmitted to the block formatter 850, and (N-I) number of symbol interleavers and symbol-byte converters configured in a parallel structure with (N-I) number of branches.
  • the group formatter 850 inserts place holders ensuring the positions (or places) for the MPEG header, the non-systematic RS parity, and the main service data. And, at the same time, the group formatter 850 positions the data bytes outputted from each branch of the block processor.
  • the number of trellis encoders, the number of symbol-byte converters, and the number of symbol interleavers proposed in the present invention are merely exemplary. And, therefore, the corresponding numbers do not limit the spirit or scope of the present invention. It is apparent to those skilled in the art that the type and position of each data byte being allocated to each trellis encoder of the trellis encoding module 256 may vary in accordance with the data group format. Therefore, the present invention should not be understood merely by the examples given in the description set forth herein.
  • the mobile service data that are encoded at a coding rate of 1/N and outputted from the block processor 303 are inputted to the group formatter 304.
  • the order of the output data outputted from the block formatter of the block processor 303 are aligned and outputted in accordance with the position of the data bytes within the data group.
  • the transmitter 200 may insert transmission parameters by using a plurality of methods and in a plurality of positions (or places), which are then transmitted to the receiving system.
  • a transmission parameter that is to be transmitted from the transmitter to the receiving system will now be described.
  • the transmission parameter includes data group information, region information within a data group, the number of RS frames configuring a super frame (i.e., a super frame size (SFS)), the number of RS parity data bytes (P) for each column within the RS frame, whether or not a checksum, which is added to determine the presence of an error in a row direction within the RS frame, has been used, the type and size of the checksum if the checksum is used (presently, 2 bytes are added to the CRC), the number of data groups configuring one RS frame since the RS frame is transmitted to one burst section, the number of data groups configuring the one RS frame is identical to the number of data groups within one burst (i.e., burst size (BS)), a turbo code mode, and a RS code mode.
  • SSS super frame size
  • P RS parity data bytes
  • the transmission parameter required for receiving a burst includes a burst period herein, one burst period corresponds to a value obtained by counting the number of fields starting from the beginning of a current burst until the beginning of a next burst, a positioning order of the RS frames that are currently being transmitted within a super frame (i.e., a permuted frame index (PFI)) or a positioning order of groups that are currently being transmitted within a RS frame (burst) (i.e., a group index (GI)), and a burst size.
  • PFI permuted frame index
  • burst group index
  • the transmission parameter also includes the number of fields remaining until the beginning of the next burst (i.e., time to next burst (TNB)). And, by transmitting such information as the transmission parameter, each data group being transmitted to the receiving system may indicate a relative distance (or number of fields) between a current position and the beginning of a next burst.
  • TTB time to next burst
  • the transmission parameter may be inserted by allocating a predetermined region of the mobile service data packet or the data group.
  • the receiving system performs synchronization and equalization on a received signal, which is then decoded by symbol units.
  • the packet deformatter may separate the mobile service data and the transmission parameter so as to detect the transmission parameter.
  • the transmission parameter may be inserted from the group formatter 304 and then transmitted.
  • the transmission parameter may be multiplexed with another type of data.
  • a transmission parameter may be inserted, instead of the known data, in a place (or position) where a known data byte is to be inserted.
  • the transmission parameter may be mixed with the known data and then inserted in the place where the known data byte is to be inserted.
  • the transmission parameter may be inserted from the group formatter 304 or from the packet formatter 306 and then transmitted.
  • the transmission parameter may be inserted by allocating a portion of a reserved region within a field synchronization segment of a transmission frame.
  • the transmission parameter having information on the processing methods of the block processor 303 and the group formatter 304 may be inserted in a reserved field of a field synchronization signal. More specifically, the receiving system obtains field synchronization by using a field synchronization segment so as to detect the transmission parameter from a pre-decided position.
  • the transmission parameter may be inserted from the synchronization multiplexer 240 and then transmitted.
  • the transmission parameter may be inserted in a layer (or hierarchical region) higher than a transport stream (TS) packet.
  • the receiving system should be able to receive a signal and process the received signal to a layer higher than the TS packet in advance.
  • the transmission parameter may be used to certify the transmission parameter of a currently received signal and to provide the transmission parameter of a signal that is to be received in a later process.
  • the variety of transmission parameters associated with the transmission signal may be inserted and transmitted by using the above-described methods according to the first to fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • the transmission parameter may be inserted and transmitted by using only one of the four embodiments described above, or by using a selection of the above-described embodiments, or by using all of the above-described embodiments.
  • the information included in the transmission parameter may be duplicated and inserted in each embodiment. Alternatively, only the required information may be inserted in the corresponding position of the corresponding embodiment and then transmitted.
  • a block encoding process of a short cycle (or period) may be performed on the transmission parameter and, then, inserted in a corresponding region.
  • the method for performing a short-period block encoding process on the transmission parameter may include, for example, Kerdock encoding, BCH encoding, RS encoding, and repetition encoding of the transmission parameter. Also, a combination of a plurality of block encoding methods may also be performed on the transmission parameter.
  • the transmission parameters may be grouped to create a block code of a small size, so as to be inserted in a byte place allocated within the data group for signaling and then transmitted.
  • the block code passes through the block decoded from the receiving end so as to obtain a transmission parameter value. Therefore, the transmission parameters of the turbo code mode and the RS code mode, which are required for block decoding, should first be obtained.
  • the transmission parameters associated with a particular mode may be inserted in a specific section of a known data region. And, in this case, a correlation of with a symbol may be used for a faster decoding process.
  • the receiving system refers to the correlation between each sequence and the currently received sequences, thereby determining the encoding mode and the combination mode.
  • the transmission parameter when the transmission parameter is inserted in the field synchronization segment region or the known data region and then transmitted, and when the transmission parameter has passed through the transmission channel, the reliability of the transmission parameter is deteriorated. Therefore, one of a plurality of pre-defined patterns may also be inserted in accordance with the corresponding transmission parameter.
  • the receiving system performs a correlation calculation between the received signal and the pre-defined patterns so as to recognize the transmission parameter. For example, it is assumed that a burst including 5 data groups is pre- decided as pattern A based upon an agreement between the transmitting system and the receiving system. In this case, the transmitting system inserts and transmits pattern A, when the number of groups within the burst is equal to 5.
  • the receiving system calculates a correlation between the received data and a plurality of reference patterns including pattern A, which was created in advance. At this point, if the correlation value between the received data and pattern A is the greatest, the received data indicates the corresponding parameter, and most particularly, the number of groups within the burst. At this point, the number of groups may be acknowledged as 5.
  • the process of inserting and transmitting the transmission parameter will now be described according to first, second, and third embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG. 21 illustrates a schematic diagram of the group formatter 304 receiving the transmission parameter and inserting the received transmission parameter in region A of the data group according to the present invention.
  • the group formatter 304 receives mobile service data from the block processor 303.
  • the transmission parameter is processed with at least one of a data randomizing process, a RS frame encoding process, and a block processing process, and may then be inputted to the group formatter 304.
  • the transmission parameter may be directly inputted to the group formatter 304 without being processed with any of the above- mentioned processes.
  • the transmission parameter may be provided from the service multiplexer 100.
  • the transmission parameter may also be generated and provided from within the transmitter 200.
  • the transmission parameter may also include information required by the receiving system in order to receive and process the data included in the data group.
  • the transmission parameter may include data group information, and multiplexing information.
  • the group formatter 304 inserts the mobile service data and transmission parameter which are to be inputted to corresponding regions within the data group in accordance with a rule for configuring a data group.
  • the transmission parameter passes through a block encoding process of a short period and is, then, inserted in region A of the data group.
  • the transmission parameter may be inserted in a pre-arranged and arbitrary position (or place) within region A.
  • the block processor 303 performs the same data processing operation as the mobile service data, more specifically, either a 1/2-rate encoding or 1/4-rate encoding process on the signaling information including the transmission parameter. Thereafter, the block processor 303 outputs the processed transmission parameter to the group formatter 304. Thereafter, the signaling information is also recognized as the mobile service data and processed accordingly.
  • FIG. 22 illustrates a block diagram showing an example of the block processor receiving the transmission parameter and processing the received transmission parameter with the same process as the mobile service data.
  • FIG. 22 illustrates an example showing the structure of FIG. 10 further including a signaling information provider 411 and multiplexer 412. More specifically, the signaling information provider 411 outputs the signaling information including the transmission parameter to the multiplexer 412.
  • the multiplexer 412 multiplexes the signaling information and the output of the RS frame encoder 302. Then, the multiplexer 412 outputs the multiplexed data to the byte-bit converter 401.
  • the byte-bit converter 401 divides the mobile service data bytes or signaling information byte outputted from the multiplexer 412 into bits, which are then outputted to the symbol encoder 402.
  • the subsequent operations are identical to those described in FIG. 10. Therefore, a detailed description of the same will be omitted for simplicity. If any of the detailed structures of the block processor 303 shown in FIG. 12, FIG. 15, FIG. 19, and FIG. 20, the signaling information provider 411 and the multiplexer 412 may be provided behind the byte-symbol converter.
  • a transmission parameter may be inserted in at least a portion of a region, where known data may be inserted, instead of the known data.
  • a transmission parameter may be inserted in at least a portion of the beginning of region A instead of the known data.
  • a portion of the known data sequence that is inserted in the remaining portion of region A, excluding the portion in which the transmission parameter is inserted, may be used to detect a starting point of the data group by the receiving system.
  • another portion of region A may be used for channel equalization by the receiving system.
  • the transmission parameter when the transmission parameter is inserted in the known data region instead of the actual known data.
  • the transmission parameter may be block encoded in short periods and then inserted.
  • the transmission parameter may also be inserted based upon a pre-defined pattern in accordance with the transmission parameter. If the group formatter 304 inserts known data place holders in a region within the data group, wherein known data may be inserted, instead of the actual known data, the transmission parameter may be inserted by the packet formatter 306. More specifically, when the group formatter 304 inserts the known data place holders, the packet formatter 306 may insert the known data instead of the known data place holders. Alternatively, when the group formatter 304 inserts the known data, the known data may be directly outputted without modification.
  • FIG. 23 illustrates a block diagram showing the structure of a packet formatter 306 being expanded so that the packet formatter 306 can insert the transmission parameter according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the structure of the packet formatter 306 further includes a known data generator 351 and a signaling multiplexer 352.
  • the transmission parameter that is inputted to the signaling multiplexer 352 may include information on the length of a current burst, information indicating a starting point of a next burst, positions in which the groups within the burst exist and the lengths of the groups, information on the time from the current group and the next group within the burst, and information on known data.
  • the signaling multiplexer 352 selects one of the transmission parameter and the known data generated from the known data generator 351 and, then, outputs the selected data to the packet formatter 306.
  • the packet formatter 306 inserts the known data or transmission parameter outputted from the signaling multiplexer 352 into the known data place holders outputted from the data interleaver 305. Then, the packet formatter 306 outputs the processed data. More specifically, the packet formatter 306 inserts a transmission parameter in at least a portion of the known data region instead of the known data, which is then outputted. For example, when a known data place holder is inserted at a beginning portion of region A within the data group, a transmission parameter may be inserted in a portion of the known data place holder instead of the actual known data.
  • the transmission parameter when the transmission parameter is inserted in the known data place holder instead of the known data, the transmission parameter may be block encoded in short periods and inserted. Alternatively, a pre-defined pattern may be inserted in accordance with the transmission parameter. More specifically, the signaling multiplexer 352 multiplexes the known data and the transmission parameter (or the pattern defined by the transmission parameter) so as to configure a new known data sequence. Then, the signaling multiplexer 352 outputs the newly configured known data sequence to the packet formatter 306.
  • the packet formatter 306 deletes the main service data place holder and RS parity place holder from the output of the data interleaver 305, and creates a mobile service data packet of 188 bytes by using the mobile service data, MPEG header, and the output of the signaling multiplexer. Then, the packet formatter 306 outputs the newly created mobile service data packet to the packet multiplexer 240.
  • the region A of each data group has a different known data pattern.
  • the receiving system separates only the symbol in a pre-arranged section of the known data sequence and recognizes the separated symbol as the transmission parameter.
  • the known data may be inserted in different blocks, such as the packet formatter 306, the group formatter 304, or the block processor 303. Therefore, a transmission parameter may be inserted instead of the known data in the block wherein the known data are to be inserted.
  • a transmission parameter including information on the processing method of the block processor 303 may be inserted in a portion of the known data region and then transmitted.
  • a symbol processing method and position of the symbol for the actual transmission parameter symbol are already decided.
  • the position of the transmission parameter symbol should be positioned so as to be transmitted or received earlier than any other data symbols that are to be decoded.
  • the receiving system may detect the transmission symbol before the data symbol decoding process, so as to use the detected transmission symbol for the decoding process.
  • the transmission parameter may also be inserted in the field synchronization segment region and then transmitted.
  • FIG. 24 illustrates a block diagram showing the synchronization multiplexer being expanded in order to allow the transmission parameter to be inserted in the field synchronization segment region.
  • a signaling multiplexer 261 is further included in the synchronization multiplexer 260.
  • the transmission parameter of the general VSB method is configured of 2 fields. More specifically, each field is configured of one field synchronization segment and 312 data segments.
  • the first 4 symbols of a data segment correspond to the segment synchronization portion, and the first data segment of each field corresponds to the field synchronization portion.
  • One field synchronization signal is configured to have the length of one data segment.
  • the data segment synchronization pattern exists in the first 4 symbols, which are then followed by pseudo random sequences PN 511, PN 63, PN 63, and PN 63.
  • the next 24 symbols include information associated with the VSB mode.
  • the 24 symbols that include information associated with the VSB mode are followed by the remaining 104 symbols, which are reserved symbols.
  • the last 12 symbols of a previous segment are copied and positioned as the last 12 symbols in the reserved region. In other words, only the 92 symbols in the field synchronization segment are the symbols that correspond to the actual reserved region.
  • the signaling multiplexer 261 multiplexes the transmission parameter with an already-existing field synchronization segment symbol, so that the transmission parameter can be inserted in the reserved region of the field synchronization segment. Then, the signaling multiplexer 261 outputs the multiplexed transmission parameter to the synchronization multiplexer 260.
  • the synchronization multiplexer 260 multiplexes the segment synchronization symbol, the data symbols, and the new field synchronization segment outputted from the signaling multiplexer 261, thereby configuring a new transmission frame.
  • the transmission frame including the field synchronization segment, wherein the transmission parameter is inserted, is outputted to the transmission unit 270.
  • the reserved region within the field synchronization segment for inserting the transmission parameter may correspond to a portion of or the entire 92 symbols of the reserved region.
  • the transmission parameter being inserted in the reserved region may, for example, include information identifying the transmission parameter as the main service data, the mobile service data, or a different type of mobile service data.
  • the receiving system If the information on the processing method of the block processor 303 is transmitted as a portion of the transmission parameter, and when the receiving system wishes to perform a decoding process corresponding to the block processor 303, the receiving system should be informed of such information on the block processing method in order to perform the decoding process. Therefore, the information on the processing method of the block processor 303 should already be known prior to the block decoding process. Accordingly, as described in the third embodiment of the present invention, when the transmission parameter having the information on the processing method of the block processor 303 (and/or the group formatter 304) is inserted in the reserved region of the field synchronization signal and then transmitted, the receiving system is capable of detecting the transmission parameter prior to performing the block decoding process on the received signal. [214]
  • FIG. 25 illustrates a block diagram showing a structure of a digital broadcast receiving system according to the present invention.
  • the digital broadcast receiving system of FIG. 25 uses known data information, which is inserted in the mobile service data section and, then, transmitted by the transmitting system, so as to perform carrier synchronization recovery, frame synchronization recovery, and channel equalization, thereby enhancing the receiving performance.
  • the digital broadcast receiving system includes a tuner 901, a demodulator 902, an equalizer 903, a known data detector 904, a block decoder 905, a data deformatter 906, a RS frame decoder 907, a derandomizer 908, a data deinterleaver 909, a RS decoder 910, and a data derandomizer 911.
  • the data deformatter 906, the RS frame decoder 907, and the derandomizer 908 will be collectively referred to as a mobile service data processing unit.
  • the data deinterleaver 909, the RS decoder 910, and the data derandomizer 911 will be collectively referred to as a main service data processing unit.
  • the tuner 901 tunes a frequency of a particular channel and down- converts the tuned frequency to an intermediate frequency (IF) signal. Then, the tuner 901 outputs the down-converted IF signal to the demodulator 902 and the known data detector 904.
  • the demodulator 902 performs self gain control, carrier recovery, and timing recovery processes on the inputted IF signal, thereby modifying the IF signal to a baseband signal. Then, the demodulator 902 outputs the newly created baseband signal to the equalizer 903 and the known data detector 904.
  • the equalizer 903 compensates the distortion of the channel included in the demodulated signal and then outputs the error-compensated signal to the block decoder 905.
  • the known data detector 904 detects the known sequence place inserted by the transmitting end from the input/output data of the demodulator 902 (i.e., the data prior to the demodulation process or the data after the demodulation process). Thereafter, the place information along with the symbol sequence of the known data, which are generated from the detected place, is outputted to the demodulator 902 and the equalizer 903. Also, the known data detector 904 outputs a set of information to the block decoder 905. This set of information is used to allow the block decoder 905 of the receiving system to identify the mobile service data that are processed with additional encoding from the transmitting system and the main service data that are not processed with additional encoding.
  • connection status is not shown in FIG. 25, the information detected from the known data detector 904 may be used throughout the entire receiving system and may also be used in the data de- formatter 906 and the RS frame decoder 907.
  • the demodulator 902 uses the known data symbol sequence during the timing and/or carrier recovery, thereby enhancing the demodulating performance.
  • the equalizer 903 uses the known data so as to enhance the equalizing performance.
  • the decoding result of the block decoder 905 may be fed-back to the equalizer 903, thereby enhancing the equalizing performance.
  • the equalizer 903 may perform channel equalization by using a plurality of methods.
  • An example of estimating a channel impulse response (CIR) so as to perform channel equalization will be given in the description of the present invention.
  • CIR channel impulse response
  • Most particularly, an example of estimating the CIR in accordance with each region within the data group, which is hierarchically divided and transmitted from the transmitting system, and applying each CIR differently will also be described herein.
  • the present invention may be able to perform channel equalization with more stability.
  • the data group that is inputted for the equalization process is divided into regions A to C, as shown in FIG. 6. More specifically, in the example of the present invention, each region A, B, and C are further divided into regions Al to A5, regions Bl and B2, and regions Cl to C3, respectively.
  • the CIR that is estimated from the field synchronization data in the data structure is referred to as CIR_FS.
  • the CIRs that are estimated from each of the 5 known data sequences existing in region A are sequentially referred to as CIR_N0, CIR_N1, CIR_N2, CIR_N3, and CIR_N4.
  • the present invention uses the CIR estimated from the field synchronization data and the known data sequences in order to perform channel equalization on data within the data group.
  • each of the estimated CIRs may be directly used in accordance with the characteristics of each region within the data group.
  • a plurality of the estimated CIRs may also be either interpolated or extrapolated so as to create a new CIR, which is then used for the channel equalization process.
  • interpolation refers to estimating a function value of a point within the section between points A and B.
  • Linear interpolation corresponds to the simplest form among a wide range of interpolation operations.
  • the linear interpolation described herein is merely exemplary among a wide range of possible interpolation methods. And, therefore, the present invention is not limited only to the examples set forth herein.
  • extrapolation refers to estimating a function value of a point outside of the section between points A and B.
  • Linear extrapolation is the simplest form among a wide range of extrapolation operations.
  • the linear extrapolation described herein is merely exemplary among a wide range of possible extrapolation methods. And, therefore, the present invention is not limited only to the examples set forth herein.
  • any one of the CIR_N4 estimated from a previous data group, the CIR_FS estimated from the current data group that is to be processed with channel equalization, and a new CIR generated by extrapolating the CIR_FS of the current data group and the CIR_N0 may be used to perform channel equalization.
  • a variety of methods may be applied as described in the case for region Cl. For example, a new CIR created by linearly extrapolating the CIR_FS estimated from the current data group and the CIR_N0 may be used to perform channel equalization. Also, the CIR_FS estimated from the current data group may also be used to perform channel equalization.
  • a new CIR may be created by interpolating the CIR_FS estimated from the current data group and CIR_N0, which is then used to perform channel equalization. Furthermore, any one of the CIR_FS estimated from the current data group and CIR_N0 may be used to perform channel equalization.
  • CIR_N(i-l) estimated from the current data group and CIR_N(i) may be interpolated to create a new CIR and use the newly created CIR to perform channel equalization.
  • any one of the CIR_N(i-l) estimated from the current data group and the CIR_N(i) may be used to perform channel equalization.
  • CIR_N3 and CIR_N4 both estimated from the current data group may be extrapolated to create a new CIR, which is then used to perform the channel equalization process.
  • the CIR_N4 estimated from the current data group may be used to perform the channel equalization process.
  • the data group decoded by the block decoder 905 is inputted to the data deformatter 906, and the main service data are inputted to the data deinterleaver 909.
  • the main data may also bypass the block decoder 905 so as to be directly inputted to the data deinterleaver 909.
  • a trellis decoder for the main service data should be provided before the data deinterleaver 909.
  • the block decoder 905 When the block decoder 905 outputs the data group to the data deformatter 906, the known data, trellis initialization data, and MPEG header, which are inserted in the data group, and the RS parity, which is added by the RS encoder/non-systematic RS encoder or non- systematic RS encoder of the transmitting system, are removed. Then, the processed data are outputted to the data deformatter 906.
  • the removal of the data may be performed before the block decoding process, or may be performed during or after the block decoding process. If the transmitting system includes signaling information in the data group upon transmission, the signaling information is outputted to the data de- formatter 906.
  • the block decoder 905 performs Viterbi decoding on the inputted data so as to output a hard decision value or to perform a hard-decision on a soft decision value, thereby outputting the result. Meanwhile, if the inputted data correspond to the mobile service data, the block decoder 905 outputs a hard decision value or a soft decision value with respect to the inputted mobile service data. In other words, if the inputted data correspond to the mobile service data, the block decoder 905 performs a decoding process on the data encoded by the block processor and trellis encoding module of the transmitting system.
  • the RS frame encoder of the pre-processor included in the transmitting system may be viewed as an external code.
  • the block processor and the trellis encoder may be viewed as an internal code.
  • the decoder of the internal code should output a soft decision value. Therefore, the block decoder 905 may output a hard decision value on the mobile service data. However, when required, it may be more preferable for the block decoder 905 to output a soft decision value.
  • the data deinterleaver 909, the RS decoder 910, and the derandomizer 911 are blocks required for receiving the main service data. Therefore, the above- mentioned blocks may not be required in the structure of a digital broadcast receiving system that only receives the mobile service data.
  • the data deinterleaver 909 performs an inverse process of the data interleaver included in the transmitting system. In other words, the data deinterleaver 909 deinterleaves the main service data outputted from the block decoder 905 and outputs the deinterleaved main service data to the RS decoder 910.
  • the RS decoder 910 performs a systematic RS decoding process on the deinterleaved data and outputs the processed data to the derandomizer 911.
  • the de- randomizer 911 receives the output of the RS decoder 910 and generates a pseudo random data byte identical to that of the randomizer included in the digital broadcast transmitting system. Thereafter, the derandomizer 911 performs a bitwise exclusive OR (XOR) operation on the generated pseudo random data byte, thereby inserting the MPEG synchronization bytes to the beginning of each packet so as to output the data in 188-byte main service data packet units.
  • XOR bitwise exclusive OR
  • the data being outputted from the block decoder 905 to the data de- formatter 906 are inputted in the form of a data group.
  • the data de- formatter 906 already knows the structure of the data that are to be inputted and is, therefore, capable of identifying the signaling information, which includes the system information, and the mobile service data from the data group.
  • the data de- formatter 906 outputs the identified signaling information to a block for processing signaling information (not shown) and outputs the identified mobile service data to the RS frame decoder 907. More specifically, the RS frame decoder 907 receives only the RS encoded and CRC encoded mobile service data that are transmitted from the data deformatter 906.
  • the RS frame encoder 907 performs an inverse process of the RS frame encoder included in the transmitting system so as to correct the error within the RS frame. Then, the RS frame decoder 907 adds the 1-byte MPEG synchronization service data packet, which had been removed during the RS frame encoding process, to the error- corrected mobile service data packet. Thereafter, the processed data packet is outputted to the derandomizer 908.
  • the operation of the RS frame decoder 907 will be described in detail in a later process.
  • the derandomizer 908 performs a derandomizing process, which corresponds to the inverse process of the randomizer included in the transmitting system, on the received mobile service data. Thereafter, the derandomized data are outputted, thereby obtaining the mobile service data transmitted from the transmitting system.
  • detailed operations of the RS frame decoder 907 will now be described.
  • FIG. 26 illustrates a series of exemplary step of an error correction decoding process of the RS frame decoder 907 according to the present invention. More specifically, the RS frame decoder 907 groups mobile service data bytes received from the data de- formatter 906 so as to configure an RS frame. The mobile service data correspond to data RS encoded and CRC encoded from the transmitting system.
  • FIG. 26(a) illustrates an example of configuring the RS frame. More specifically, the transmitting system divided the RS frame having the size of (N+2)*235 to 30*235 byte blocks.
  • the receiving system When it is assumed that each of the divided mobile service data byte blocks is inserted in each data group and then transmitted, the receiving system also groups the 30*235 mobile service data byte blocks respectively inserted in each data group, thereby configuring an RS frame having the size of (N+2)*235. For example, when it is assumed that an RS frame is divided into 18 30*235 byte blocks and transmitted from a burst section, the receiving system also groups the mobile service data bytes of 18 data groups within the corresponding burst section, so as to configure the RS frame.
  • the RS frame decoder 907 may group the mobile service data bytes within the 18 data groups included in a burst so as to configure a RS frame having the size of 540*235 bytes.
  • the RS frame decoder 907 may decide the '0' and T of the corresponding bit by using the codes of the soft decision value. 8 bits that are each decided as described above are grouped to create 1 data byte. If the above-described process is performed on all soft decision values of the 18 data groups included in a single burst, the RS frame having the size of 540*235 bytes may be configured. Additionally, the present invention uses the soft decision value not only to configure the RS frame but also to configure a reliability map.
  • the reliability map indicates the reliability of the corresponding data byte, which is configured by grouping 8 bits, the 8 bits being decided by the codes of the soft decision value.
  • the value of the corresponding bit when the absolute value of the soft decision value exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the value of the corresponding bit, which is decided by the code of the corresponding soft decision value, is determined to be reliable. Conversely, when the absolute value of the soft decision value does not exceed the pre-determined threshold value, the value of the corresponding bit is determined to be unreliable. Thereafter, if even a single bit among the 8 bits, which are decided by the codes of the soft decision value and group to configure 1 data byte, is determined to be unreliable, the corresponding data byte is marked on the reliability map as an unreliable data byte.
  • determining the reliability of 1 data byte is only exemplary. More specifically, when a plurality of data bytes (e.g., at least 4 data bytes) are determined to be unreliable, the corresponding data bytes may also be marked as unreliable data bytes within the reliability map. Conversely, when all of the data bits within the 1 data byte are determined to be reliable (i.e., when the absolute value of the soft decision values of all 8 bits included in the 1 data byte exceed the predetermined threshold value), the corresponding data byte is marked to be a reliable data byte on the reliability map.
  • the corresponding data bytes may also be marked as reliable data bytes within the reliability map.
  • the numbers proposed in the above-described example are merely exemplary and, therefore, do not limit the scope or spirit of the present invention.
  • the process of configuring the RS frame and the process of configuring the reliability map both using the soft decision value may be performed at the same time.
  • the reliability information within the reliability map is in a one-to-one correspondence with each byte within the RS frame. For example, if a RS frame has the size of 540*235 bytes, the reliability map is also configured to have the size of 540*235 bytes.
  • FIG. 26(a') illustrates the process steps of configuring the reliability map according to the present invention.
  • the RS frame decoder 907 performs a CRC syndrome checking process on the corresponding RS frame, thereby verifying whether any error has occurred in each row. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 26(b), a 2-byte checksum is removed to configure an RS frame having the size of N*235 bytes. Herein, the presence (or existence) of an error is indicated on an error flag corresponding to each row. Similarly, since the portion of the reliability map corresponding to the CRC checksum has hardly any applicability, this portion is removed so that only N*235 number of the reliability information bytes remain, as shown in FIG. 26(b').
  • the RS frame decoder 907 After performing the CRC syndrome checking process, the RS frame decoder 907 performs RS decoding in a column direction.
  • a RS erasure correction process may be performed in accordance with the number of CRC error flags. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 26(c), the CRC error flag corresponding to each row within the RS frame is verified. Thereafter, the RS frame decoder 907 determines whether the number of rows having a CRC error occurring therein is equal to or smaller than the maximum number of errors on which the RS erasure correction may be performed, when performing the RS decoding process in a column direction.
  • the maximum number of errors corresponds to a number of parity bytes inserted when performing the RS encoding process. In the embodiment of the present invention, it is assumed that 48 parity bytes have been added to each column.
  • a (235,187)-RS erasure decoding process is performed in a column direction on the RS frame having 235 N- byte rows, as shown in FIG. 26(d). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26(f), the 48-byte parity data that have been added at the end of each column are removed.
  • the RS erasure decoding process cannot be performed.
  • the error may be corrected by performing a general RS decoding process.
  • the reliability map which has been created based upon the soft decision value along with the RS frame, may be used to further enhance the error correction ability (or performance) of the present invention.
  • the RS frame decoder 907 compares the absolute value of the soft decision value of the block decoder 905 with the pre-determined threshold value, so as to determine the reliability of the bit value decided by the code of the corresponding soft decision value. Also, 8 bits, each being determined by the code of the soft decision value, are grouped to form 1 data byte. Accordingly, the reliability information on this 1 data byte is indicated on the reliability map. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26(e), even though a particular row is determined to have an error occurring therein based upon a CRC syndrome checking process on the particular row, the present invention does not assume that all bytes included in the row have errors occurring therein.
  • the present invention refers to the reliability information of the reliability map and sets only the bytes that have been determined to be unreliable as erroneous bytes. In other words, with disregard to whether or not a CRC error exists within the corresponding row, only the bytes that are determined to be unreliable based upon the reliability map are set as erasure points.
  • the number of rows having CRC errors included therein is greater than the maximum number of errors (i.e., 48 errors) that can be corrected by the RS erasure decoding process
  • either an RS erasure decoding process or a general RS decoding process is performed on a column that is decided based upon the reliability information of the reliability map, in accordance with the number of erasure points within the corresponding column.
  • the number of rows having CRC errors included therein within the RS frame is greater than 48.
  • the number of erasure points decided based upon the reliability information of the reliability map is indicated as 40 erasure points in the first column and as 50 erasure points in the second column.
  • a (235,187)-RS erasure decoding process is performed on the first column.
  • a (235,187)-RS decoding process is performed on the second column.
  • the number of errors corresponding to half of the number of parity bytes (i.e., (number of parity bytes)/2) that are inserted during the RS encoding process may be error corrected (e.g., 24 errors may be corrected).
  • the number of errors corresponding to the number of parity bytes that are inserted during the RS encoding process may be error corrected (e.g., 48 errors may be corrected).
  • a RS frame configured of 187 N-byte rows (or packets) maybe obtained, as shown in FIG. 26(f). Furthermore, the RS frame having the size of N* 187 bytes is sequentially outputted in N number of 187-byte units.
  • the 1-byte MPEG synchronization byte that was removed by the transmitting system is added at the end of each 187-byte packet, thereby outputting 188-byte mobile service data packets.
  • FIG. 27 illustrates an example of a data structure of a VSB signal transmitted by a digital broadcast transmitting system in which a known data sequence having a same pattern is periodically inserted into the valid data.
  • A represents a number of valid data symbols and B represents a number of known data symbols in each data block.
  • B represents a number of known data symbols in each data block.
  • the data having A symbols may be mobile service data, main service data or a combination of mobile and main service data.
  • the data having A symbols will be called valid data.
  • a digital broadcast receiving system may detect the location of the known data shown in FIG. 27 and can estimate a coarse frequency offset value during the known data location detection. Thereafter, the receiving system may further estimate a carrier frequency offset value using the known data location information and the coarse frequency offset value.
  • FIG. 28 illustrates a detailed block diagram of an example of the demodulator 902 shown in FIG. 25.
  • the demodulator 902 includes a phase splitter 1511, a numerically controlled oscillator (NCO) 1512, a first multiplier 1513, a resampler 1514, a second multiplier 1515, a matched filter 1516, a DC remover 1517, a decimator 1518, a timing recovery unit 1520, a carrier recovery unit 1530, and a phase compensation unit 1540.
  • NCO numerically controlled oscillator
  • the timing recovery unit 1520 includes a buffer 1521, a decimator 1522, a timing error detector 1523, a loop filter 1524, a holder 1525, and a numerically controlled oscillator (NCO) 1526.
  • the carrier recovery unit 1530 performs carrier recovery on the signals resampled by the resampler 1515 by estimating a frequency offset value of the signals using the known data sequence detected by the known sequence detector 1450.
  • the carrier recovery unit 1530 includes a buffer 1531, a frequency offset estimator 1532, a loop filter 1533, a holder 1534, an adder 1535, and a numerically controlled oscillator (NCO) 1536.
  • the phase compensation unit 1540 includes a buffer 1541, a frequency offset estimator 1542, a holder 1543, a numerically controlled oscillator (NCO) 1544, and a multiplier 1545.
  • the decimators 1518 and 1522 are required when an input signal is oversampled at a sampling rate of N in an analog-to-digital converter (ADC) (not illustrated).
  • ADC analog-to-digital converter
  • Each of the decimators 1518 and 1522 decimates the oversampled signal at a rate of 1/N. For example, if an input signal is oversampled at a rate of 2 such that one symbol includes two samples, the decimators 1518 and 1522 decimate the oversampled input signal at a rate of 1/2.
  • the input signal may bypass the decimators 1518 and 1522 if the input signal is not oversampled.
  • the phase splitter 1511 splits a digital passband signal outputted from an analog-to-digital converter (ADC) into a complex signal, i.e., I and Q signals.
  • I and Q signals corresponds to real and imaginary components of the digital passband signal, respectively, and phases of I and Q signals are orthogonal to each other.
  • the first multiplier 1513 converts (transits) the passband I and Q signals outputted from the phase splitter 1511 into baseband signals by multiplying the passband I and Q signals with a complex signal which is generated by the NCO 1512 and has a frequency proportional to a predetermined constant value.
  • the baseband signals are inputted to the resampler 1514 which resamples the baseband signals according to a timing clock provided by the NCO 1526 of the timing recovery unit 1520.
  • the baseband signals outputted from the first multiplier 1513 and having a frequency of 25 MHz are in- terpolated in the resampler 1514 and are restored into baseband signals having a frequency of 21.524476 MHz which is two times greater than a symbol clock of the input signal.
  • the ADC uses a variable frequency of the output signal of the NCO 1526 of the timing recovery unit 1520 as a resampling frequency, the resampler 1514 may not be required.
  • the second multiplier 1515 multiplies the signals outputted from the resampler 1514 with the output frequency of the NCO 1536 included in the carrier recovery unit 1530 in order to compensate a residual carrier, and it outputs the compensated signals into the matched filter 1516 and the timing recovery unit 1520.
  • the matched filter 1516 filters the compensated signals and the filtered signals are inputted to the DC remover 1517, the known sequence detector 1450, and the carrier recovery unit 1530.
  • the known data detector 1450 detects a location of a known data sequence which is transmitted periodically or non-periodically and estimates an initial frequency offset during the known data detection.
  • the known sequence detector 450 detects a position of the known data included in the VSB data frame, and outputs the detected position information (a known sequence position indicator) to the timing recovery unit 1520, the carrier recovery unit 1530, and the phase compensation unit 1540 included in the demodulator 920 shown in FIG. 28. Furthermore, the known sequence detector 1450 estimates an initial frequency offset and outputs the estimated initial frequency offset to the carrier recovery 1530.
  • the timing recovery unit 1520 receives the signals compensated by the second multiplier 1515 as shown in FIG. 28, or it may receive the signals (not compensated) directly outputted from the resampler 1514.
  • the buffer 1521 included in the timing recovery unit 1520 temporarily stores the received signals, and the decimator 1522 decimates the stored signals at a rate of 1/N if the stored signals are oversampled at a sampling rate of N.
  • the timing error detector 1523 detects a timing error of the decimated signals. More details of the timing error detector 1523 are described below.
  • FIG. 29 illustrates a first example of the timing recovery unit 1520 included in the demodulator 902 shown in FIG. 28.
  • the timing recovery unit 1520 includes a timing error detector 1523, a loop filter 1524, and a NCO 1526.
  • the baseband signal outputted from the resampler 1514 is inputted to the timing error detector 1523.
  • the timing error detector 1523 detects a timing error from the baseband signal using, e.g., a spectrum line method in which a sideband of a spectrum of the baseband signal is used.
  • a known sequence periodically inserted as shown in FIG. 27 can be used to detect a timing error of the baseband signal.
  • the timing recovery unit 1526 enables the resampler 1514 to output timing clock recovered data.
  • FIG. 30 illustrates a second example of the timing recovery unit 1520 included in the demodulator 902 shown in FIG. 28.
  • the timing recovery unit 1520 includes a first timing error detector 1523a, a second timing error detector 1523b, a multiplexer 1523c, a loop-filter 1524, and an NCO 1526.
  • the timing recovery unit 1520 would be beneficial when the input signal is divided into a first area in which known data having a predetermined length are inserted at predetermined position(s) and a second area that includes no known data.
  • the multiplexer 1523c can output the first timing error for the first area and can output the second timing error for the second area.
  • the multiplexer 1523c may output both of the first and second timing errors for the first area in which the known data are inserted.
  • This disclosure describes two ways of detecting a timing error.
  • One way is to detect a timing error using correlation in the time domain between known data pre-known to a transmitting system and a receiving system (reference known data) and the known data actually received by the receiving system, and the other way is to detect a timing error using correlation in the frequency domain between two known data actually received by the receiving system.
  • a timing error is detected by calculating correlation between the reference known data pre-known to and generated by the receiving system and the known data actually received.
  • correlation between an entire portion of the reference know data sequence and an entire portion of the received known data sequence is calculated.
  • the correlation output has a peak value at the end of each known data sequence actually received.
  • a timing error is detected by calculating correlation values between divided portions of the reference known data sequence and divided portions of the received known data sequence, respectively.
  • the correlation output has a peak value at the end of each divided portion of the received known data sequence.
  • the correlation values may be added as a total correlation value as shown FIG. 32, and the total correlation value can be used to calculate the timing error.
  • the timing error can be obtained for each data block. If the correlation level of the entire portion of the known data sequence is low, a more precise correlation can be obtained by using divided portions of the known data sequence as shown in FIG. 32.
  • the use of a final correlation value which is obtained based upon a plurality of correlation values of divided portions of a received known data sequence may reduce the carrier frequency error.
  • the process time for the timing recovery can be greatly reduced when the plurality of correlation values are used to calculate the timing error.
  • K correlation values between the K portions of the reference known data sequence and the corresponding divided portions of the received known data sequence can be calculated, or any combination(s) of the correlation values can be used. Therefore, the period of the timing error detection can be reduced when the divided portions of the known data sequence are used instead of the entire portion of the sequence.
  • the timing error can be calculated from the peak value of the correlation values.
  • the timing error is obtained for each data block if an entire portion of the known data sequence is used as shown in FIG. 33.
  • K divided portions of the known data sequence are used for correlation calculation, K correlation values and corresponding peak values can be obtained. This indicates that the timing error can be detected K times.
  • FIG. 33 illustrates correlation values between the reference known data and the received known data.
  • the correlation values correspond to data samples sampled at a rate two times greater than the symbol clock.
  • the correlation values between the reference known data and the received known data are symmetrical.
  • the timing error can be obtained by using a difference (timing phase error shown in FIG. 33) between the correlation values before and after the peak value.
  • FIG. 34 illustrates an example of the timing error detector 1523 shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29, and FIG. 30.
  • the timing error detector 1523 includes a correlator 1621, a down sampler 1623, an absolute value calculator 1625, a delay 1627, and a subtracter 1629.
  • the correlator 1621 receives a known data sequence sampled at a rate at least two times higher than the symbol clock frequency and calculates the correlation values between the received known data sequence and a reference known data sequence.
  • the down sampler 1623 performs down sampling on the correlation values and obtains samples having a symbol frequency.
  • the down sampler 1621 performs down sampling at a rate of 1/2 to obtain samples having the symbol frequency.
  • the absolute value calculator 1625 calculates absolute values (or square values) of the down-sampled correlation values. These absolute values are inputted to the delay 1627 and the subtractor 1629.
  • the delay 1627 delays the absolute values for a symbol and the subtractor then outputs a timing error by subtracting the delayed absolute value from the values outputted from the absolute value calculator 1625.
  • the arrangement of the correlator 1621, the down sampler 1623, the absolute value calculator 1625, and the delay 1627, and the subtractor 1629 shown in FIG. 34 can be modified.
  • the timing phase error can be calculated in the order of the down sampler 1623, the correlator 1621, and the absolute value calculator 1625, or in the order of the correlator 1621, the absolute value calculator 1625, and the down sampler 1623.
  • the timing error can also be obtained using the frequency characteristic of the known data.
  • a phase of the input signal increases at a fixed slope as the frequency of the signal increases and this slope is different for current and next data block. Therefore, the timing error can be calculated based on the frequency characteristic of two different known data blocks.
  • a current known data sequence (right) and a previous known data sequence (left) are converted into first and second frequency domain signals, respectively, using a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) algorithm.
  • FFT Fast Fourier Transform
  • the conjugate value of the first frequency domain signal is then multiplied with the second frequency domain signal in order to obtain the correlation value between two frequency domain signals.
  • the correlation between the frequency value of the previous known data sequence and the frequency value of the current known data sequence is used to detect a phase change between the known data blocks for each frequency. In this way the phase distortion of a channel can be eliminated.
  • the frequency response of a complex VSB signal does not have a full symmetric distribution as shown in FIG. 33. Rather, its distribution is a left or right half of the distribution and the frequency domain correlation values also have a half distribution.
  • the frequency domain having the correlation values can be divided into two sub-areas and a phase of a combined correlation value in each sub-area can be obtained. Thereafter, the difference between the phases of sub-areas can be used to calculate a timing frequency error.
  • the magnitude of each correlation value is proportional to reliability and a phase component of each correlation value is reflected to the final phase component in proportion to the magnitude.
  • the timing error detector 1523 shown in FIG. 36 includes a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) unit 1601, a first delay 1603, a conjugator 1605, a multiplier 1607, an accumulator (adder) 1609, a phase detector 1611, a second delay 1613, and a sub tractor 1615.
  • the first delay 1603 delays for one data block and the second delay 1613 delays for 1/4 data block.
  • One data block includes a frequency response of a sequence of N known data symbol sequences. When a known data region is known and the data symbols are received, the FFT unit 1601 converts complex values of consecutive N known data symbol sequences into complex values in the frequency domain.
  • the first delay 1603 delays the frequency domain complex values for a time corresponding to one data block, and the conjugator 1605 generate conjugate values of the delayed complex values.
  • the multiplier 1607 multiplies the current block of known data outputted from the FFT unit 1601 with the previous block of known data outputted from the conjugator 1605.
  • the output of the multiplier 1607 represents frequency region correlation values within a known data block.
  • the accumulator 1609 divides a data region in the known data block into two sub-regions, and accumulates correlation values for each sub-region.
  • the phase detector 1611 detects a phase of the accumulated correlation value for each sub-region.
  • the second delay 1613 delays the detected phase for a time corresponding to a 1/4 data block.
  • the subtracter 1615 obtains a phase difference between the delayed phase and the phase outputted from the accumulator 1611 and outputs the phase difference as a timing frequency error.
  • the contribution of the correlation values may affect a channel when the channel is a multi path channel.
  • this can be greatly eliminated if the timing error is obtained using the correlation between two received known data.
  • the timing error can be detected using an entire portion of the known data sequence inserted by the transmitting system, or it can be detected using a portion of the known data sequence which is robust to random or noise data.
  • the present invention is highly protected against (or resistant to) any error that may occur when transmitting mobile service data through a channel. And, the present invention is also highly compatible to the conventional receiving system. Moreover, the present invention may also receive the mobile service data without any error even in channels having severe ghost effect and noise.
  • the receiving performance of the receiving system may be enhanced even in a channel environment that is liable to frequent changes. Also, by multiplexing mobile service data with main service data into a burst structure, the power consumption of the receiving system may be reduced.

Abstract

A digital television (DTV) receiving system includes an information detector, a resampler, a timing recovery unit, and a carrier recovery unit. The information detector detects a known data sequence which is periodically inserted in a digital television (DTV) signal received from a DTV transmitting system. The resampler resamples the DTV signal at a predetermined resampling rate. The timing recovery unit performs timing recovery on the DTV signal by detecting a timing error from the resampled DTV signal using the detected known data sequence. The carrier recovery unit performs carrier recovery on the resampled DTV signal by estimating a frequency offset value of the resampled DTV signal using the detected known data sequence.

Description

Description
DTV RECEIVING SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROCESSING
DTV SIGNAL
Technical Field
[1] The present invention relates to a digital television (DTV) systems and methods of processing television signals. Background Art
[2] The Vestigial Sideband (VSB) transmission mode, which is adopted as the standard for digital broadcasting in North America and the Republic of Korea, is a system using a single carrier method. Therefore, the receiving performance of the digital broadcast receiving system may be deteriorated in a poor channel environment. Disclosure of Invention
Technical Problem
[3] Particularly, since resistance to changes in channels and noise is more highly required when using portable and/or mobile broadcast receivers, the receiving performance may be even more deteriorated when transmitting mobile service data by the VSB transmission mode. Technical Solution
[4] Accordingly, the present invention is directed to DTV systems and methods of processing television signals that substantially obviate one or more problems due to limitations and disadvantages of the related art.
[5] An object of the present invention is to provide DTV systems and methods of processing television signals that are highly resistant to channel changes and noise.
[6] Another object of the present invention is to provide DTV systems and methods of processing television signals that can enhance the receiving performance of a digital broadcast receiving system by performing additional encoding on mobile service data and by transmitting the processed data to the receiving system.
[7] A further object of the present invention is to provide DTV systems and methods of processing television signals that can also enhance the receiving performance of a digital broadcast receiving system by inserting known data already known in accordance with a pre-agreement between the receiving system and the transmitting system in a predetermined area within a data area.
[8] Additional advantages, objects, and features of the invention will be set forth in part in the description which follows and in part will become apparent to those having ordinary skill in the art upon examination of the following or may be learned from practice of the invention. The objectives and other advantages of the invention may be realized and attained by the structure particularly pointed out in the written description and claims hereof as well as the appended drawings.
[9] To achieve these objects and other advantages and in accordance with the purpose of the invention, as embodied and broadly described herein, a digital television (DTV) receiving system includes an information detector, a resampler, a timing recovery unit, and a carrier recovery unit. The information detector detects a known data sequence which is periodically inserted in a digital television (DTV) signal received from a DTV transmitting system. The resampler resamples the DTV signal at a predetermined resampling rate. The timing recovery unit performs timing recovery on the DTV signal by detecting a timing error from the resampled DTV signal using the detected known data sequence. The carrier recovery unit performs carrier recovery on the resampled DTV signal by estimating a frequency offset value of the resampled DTV signal using the detected known data sequence.
[10] In one aspect of the present invention, the timing recovery unit includes a timing error detector which detecting the timing error by calculating correlation between the detected known data sequence and a reference data sequence. More specifically, the timing error may be detected by calculating a correlation value between an entire portion of the known data sequence and an entire portion of the reference data sequence. Alternatively, correlation values between a plurality of divided portions of the known data sequence and a plurality of divided portions of the reference data sequence can be calculated in order to obtain the timing error.
[11] In another aspect of the present invention, the timing recovery unit may includes a timing error detector which detects the timing error by calculating a correlation value between two known data sequences detected from the DTV signals in the frequency domain. The known data sequences used to obtain the timing error may be consecutive.
[12] It is to be understood that both the foregoing general description and the following detailed description of the present invention are exemplary and explanatory and are intended to provide further explanation of the invention as claimed.
Advantageous Effects
[13] The utility and effect of the digital broadcast systems and data process methods according to the present invention are as follows. First, the systems are robust to the channel noise. Second, the additional process is performed to the mobile service data before transmission in order to enhance the data process in a receiving system. Third, the data pre-known to the transmitting system and the receiving system are inserted into a data region before data transmission, and this also enhances the performance of the receiving system. Finally, the present invention is even more effective when applied to mobile and portable receivers, which are also liable to a frequent change in channel and which require protection (or resistance) against intense noise. Brief Description of the Drawings
[14] The accompanying drawings, which are included to provide a further understanding of the invention and are incorporated in and constitute a part of this application, illustrate embodiment(s) of the invention and together with the description serve to explain the principle of the invention. In the drawings:
[15] FIG. 1 illustrates a block diagram of a digital broadcast system according to an embodiment of the present invention;
[16] FIG. 2 illustrates a block diagram of a service multiplexer of FIG. 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention;
[17] FIG. 3 illustrates a block diagram of a transmitter of FIG. 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention;
[18] FIG. 4 illustrates a block diagram of a pre-processor of FIG. 3 according to an embodiment of the present invention;
[19] FIG. 5 (a) to FIG. 5(e) illustrate process steps of error correction encoding and error detection encoding processes according to an embodiment of the present invention;
[20] FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 respectively illustrate examples of a data structure before and after a data deinterleaver in a digital broadcast transmitting system according to the present invention;
[21] FIG. 8 illustrates an example of a process for dividing a RS frame in order to configure a data group according to the present invention;
[22] FIG. 9 illustrates an example of an operation of a packet multiplexer for transmitting the data group according to the present invention;
[23] FIG. 10 illustrates a block diagram of a block processor according to an embodiment of the present invention;
[24] FIG. 11 illustrates a detailed block diagram of a symbol encoder of FIG. 10;
[25] FIG. 12(a) to FIG. 12(c) illustrates an example of a variable length interleaving process of a symbol interleaver shown in FIG. 10;
[26] FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 respectively illustrate block diagrams of a block processor according to another embodiment of the present invention;
[27] FIG. 15(a) to FIG. 15(c) illustrates an example of a block encoding and trellis encoding processes according to the present invention;
[28] FIG. 16 illustrates a block diagram of a trellis encoding module according to an embodiment of the present invention;
[29] FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 illustrate a block processor and a trellis encoding module being connected to one another according to the present invention; [30] FIG. 19 illustrates a block processor according to yet another embodiment of the present invention; [31] FIG. 20 illustrates a block processor according to yet another embodiment of the present invention; [32] FIG. 21 illustrates an example of a group formatter inserting and transmitting a transmission parameter; [33] FIG. 22 illustrates an example of a block processor inserting and transmitting a transmission parameter; [34] FIG. 23 illustrates an example of a packet formatter inserting and transmitting a transmission parameter; [35] FIG. 24 illustrates an example for inserting and transmitting the transmission parameter in a field synchronization segment area; [36] FIG. 25 illustrates a block diagram of a digital broadcast receiving system according to the present invention; [37] FIG. 26 illustrates an example of an error correction decoding process according to the present invention; [38] FIG. 27 illustrates an example of a data structure of a VSB signal transmitted by a digital broadcast transmitting system according to the present invention; [39] FIG. 28 illustrates a detailed block diagram of an example of a demodulator according to the present invention; [40] FIG. 29 illustrates a first example of the timing recovery unit according to the present invention; [41] FIG. 30 illustrates a second example of the timing recovery unit according to the present invention; [42] FIG. 31 (a) and FIG. 31(b) illustrate examples of detecting timing error in a time domain; [43] FIG. 32(a) and FIG. 32(b) illustrate other examples of detecting timing error in a time domain; [44] FIG. 33 illustrates an example of detecting timing error using correlation values of
FIG. 3 l and FIG. 32; [45] FIG. 34 illustrates an example of a timing error detector according to the present invention; [46] FIG. 35 illustrates an example of detecting timing error in a frequency domain according to an embodiment of the present invention; and [47] FIG. 36 illustrates another example of a timing error detector according to the present invention.
Best Mode for Carrying Out the Invention [48] Reference will now be made in detail to the preferred embodiments of the present invention, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings. Wherever possible, the same reference numbers will be used throughout the drawings to refer to the same or like parts. In addition, although the terms used in the present invention are selected from generally known and used terms, some of the terms mentioned in the description of the present invention have been selected by the applicant at his or her discretion, the detailed meanings of which are described in relevant parts of the description herein. Furthermore, it is required that the present invention is understood, not simply by the actual terms used but by the meaning of each term lying within.
[49] Among the terms used in the description of the present invention, main service data correspond to data that can be received by a fixed receiving system and may include audio/video (A/V) data. More specifically, the main service data may include A/V data of high definition (HD) or standard definition (SD) levels and may also include diverse data types required for data broadcasting. Also, the known data correspond to data pre- known in accordance with a pre-arranged agreement between the receiving system and the transmitting system. Additionally, in the present invention, mobile service data may include at least one of mobile service data, pedestrian service data, and handheld service data, and are collectively referred to as mobile service data for simplicity. Herein, the mobile service data not only correspond to mobile/pedestrian/handheld service data (M/P/H service data) but may also include any type of service data with mobile or portable characteristics. Therefore, the mobile service data according to the present invention are not limited only to the M/P/H service data.
[50] The above-described mobile service data may correspond to data having information, such as program execution files, stock information, and so on, and may also correspond to A/V data. Most particularly, the mobile service data may correspond to A/V data having lower resolution and lower data rate as compared to the main service data. For example, if an A/V codec that is used for a conventional main service corresponds to a MPEG-2 codec, a MPEG-4 advanced video coding (AVC) or scalable video coding (SVC) having better image compression efficiency may be used as the A/ V codec for the mobile service. Furthermore, any type of data may be transmitted as the mobile service data. For example, transport protocol expert group (TPEG) data for broadcasting real-time transportation information may be serviced as the main service data.
[51] Also, a data service using the mobile service data may include weather forecast services, traffic information services, stock information services, viewer participation quiz programs, real-time polls & surveys, interactive education broadcast programs, gaming services, services providing information on synopsis, character, background music, and filming sites of soap operas or series, services providing information on past match scores and player profiles and achievements, and services providing information on product information and programs classified by service, medium, time, and theme enabling purchase orders to be processed. Herein, the present invention is not limited only to the services mentioned above. In the present invention, the transmitting system provides backward compatibility in the main service data so as to be received by the conventional receiving system. Herein, the main service data and the mobile service data are multiplexed to the same physical channel and then transmitted.
[52] The transmitting system according to the present invention performs additional encoding on the mobile service data and inserts the data already known by the receiving system and transmitting system (i.e., known data), thereby transmitting the processed data. Therefore, when using the transmitting system according to the present invention, the receiving system may receive the mobile service data during a mobile state and may also receive the mobile service data with stability despite various distortion and noise occurring within the channel.
[53]
[54] General description of a transmitting system
[55] FIG. 1 illustrates a block diagram showing a general structure of a digital broadcast transmitting system according to an embodiment of the present invention. Herein, the digital broadcast transmitting includes a service multiplexer 100 and a transmitter 200. Herein, the service multiplexer 100 is located in the studio of each broadcast station, and the transmitter 200 is located in a site placed at a predetermined distance from the studio. The transmitter 200 may be located in a plurality of different locations. Also, for example, the plurality of transmitters may share the same frequency. And, in this case, the plurality of transmitters receives the same signal. Accordingly, in the receiving system, a channel equalizer may compensate signal distortion, which is caused by a reflected wave, so as to recover the original signal. In another example, the plurality of transmitters may have different frequencies with respect to the same channel.
[56] A variety of methods may be used for data communication each of the transmitters, which are located in remote positions, and the service multiplexer. For example, an interface standard such as a synchronous serial interface for transport of MPEG-2 data (SMPTE-310M). In the SMPTE-310M interface standard, a constant data rate is decided as an output data rate of the service multiplexer. For example, in case of the 8VSB mode, the output data rate is 19.39 Mbps, and, in case of the 16VSB mode, the output data rate is 38.78 Mbps. Furthermore, in the conventional 8VSB mode transmitting system, a transport stream (TS) packet having a data rate of approximately 19.39 Mbps may be transmitted through a single physical channel. Also, in the transmitting system according to the present invention provided with backward compatibility with the conventional transmitting system, additional encoding is performed on the mobile service data. Thereafter, the additionally encoded mobile service data are multiplexed with the main service data to a TS packet form, which is then transmitted. At this point, the data rate of the multiplexed TS packet is approximately 19.39 Mbps.
[57] At this point, the service multiplexer 100 receives at least one type of mobile service data and program specific information (PSI)/program and system information protocol (PSIP) table data for each mobile service and encapsulates the received data to each transport stream (TS) packet. Also, the service multiplexer 100 receives at least one type of main service data and PSI/PSIP table data for each main service so as to encapsulate the received data to a TS packet. Subsequently, the TS packets are multiplexed according to a predetermined multiplexing rule and outputs the multiplexed packets to the transmitter 200.
[58]
[59] Service multiplexer
[60] FIG. 2 illustrates a block diagram showing an example of the service multiplexer.
The service multiplexer includes a controller 110 for controlling the overall operations of the service multiplexer, a PSI/PSIP generator 120 for the main service, a PSI/PSIP generator 130 for the mobile service, a null packet generator 140, a mobile service multiplexer 150, and a transport multiplexer 160. The transport multiplexer 160 may include a main service multiplexer 161 and a transport stream (TS) packet multiplexer 162. Referring to FIG. 2, at least one type of compression encoded main service data and the PSI/PSIP table data generated from the PSI/PSIP generator 120 for the main service are inputted to the main service multiplexer 161 of the transport multiplexer 160. The main service multiplexer 161 encapsulates each of the inputted main service data and PSI/PSIP table data to MPEG-2 TS packet forms. Then, the MPEG-2 TS packets are multiplexed and outputted to the TS packet multiplexer 162. Herein, the data packet being outputted from the main service multiplexer 161 will be referred to as a main service data packet for simplicity.
[61] Thereafter, at least one type of the compression encoded mobile service data and the
PSI/PSIP table data generated from the PSI/PSIP generator 130 for the mobile service are inputted to the mobile service multiplexer 150. The mobile service multiplexer 150 encapsulates each of the inputted mobile service data and PSI/PSIP table data to MPEG-2 TS packet forms. Then, the MPEG-2 TS packets are multiplexed and outputted to the TS packet multiplexer 162. Herein, the data packet being outputted from the mobile service multiplexer 150 will be referred to as a mobile service data packet for simplicity. At this point, the transmitter 200 requires identification information in order to identify and process the main service data packet and the mobile service data packet. Herein, the identification information may use values pre-decided in accordance with an agreement between the transmitting system and the receiving system, or may be configured of a separate set of data, or may modify predetermined location value with in the corresponding data packet. As an example of the present invention, a different packet identifier (PID) may be assigned to identify each of the main service data packet and the mobile service data packet.
[62] In another example, by modifying a synchronization data byte within a header of the mobile service data, the service data packet may be identified by using the synchronization data byte value of the corresponding service data packet. For example, the synchronization byte of the main service data packet directly outputs the value decided by the ISO/IEC13818-1 standard (i.e., 0x47) without any modification. The synchronization byte of the mobile service data packet modifies and outputs the value, thereby identifying the main service data packet and the mobile service data packet. Conversely, the synchronization byte of the main service data packet is modified and outputted, whereas the synchronization byte of the mobile service data packet is directly outputted without being modified, thereby enabling the main service data packet and the mobile service data packet to be identified.
[63] A plurality of methods may be applied in the method of modifying the synchronization byte. For example, each bit of the synchronization byte may be inversed, or only a portion of the synchronization byte may be inversed. As described above, any type of identification information may be used to identify the main service data packet and the mobile service data packet. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited only to the example set forth in the description of the present invention.
[64] Meanwhile, a transport multiplexer used in the conventional digital broadcasting system may be used as the transport multiplexer 160 according to the present invention. More specifically, in order to multiplex the mobile service data and the main service data and to transmit the multiplexed data, the data rate of the main service is limited to a data rate of (19.39-K) Mbps. Then, K Mbps, which corresponds to the remaining data rate, is assigned as the data rate of the mobile service. Thus, the transport multiplexer which is already being used may be used as it is without any modification. Herein, the transport multiplexer 160 multiplexes the main service data packet being outputted from the main service multiplexer 161 and the mobile service data packet being outputted from the mobile service multiplexer 150. Thereafter, the transport multiplexer 160 transmits the multiplexed data packets to the transmitter 200.
[65] However, in some cases, the output data rate of the mobile service multiplexer 150 may not be equal to K Mbps. In this case, the mobile service multiplexer 150 multiplexes and outputs null data packets generated from the null packet generator 140 so that the output data rate can reach K Mbps. More specifically, in order to match the output data rate of the mobile service multiplexer 150 to a constant data rate, the null packet generator 140 generates null data packets, which are then outputted to the mobile service multiplexer 150. For example, when the service multiplexer 100 assigns K Mbps of the 19.39 Mbps to the mobile service data, and when the remaining (19.39-K) Mbps is, therefore, assigned to the main service data, the data rate of the mobile service data that are multiplexed by the service multiplexer 100 actually becomes lower than K Mbps. This is because, in case of the mobile service data, the pre-processor of the transmitting system performs additional encoding, thereby increasing the amount of data. Eventually, the data rate of the mobile service data, which may be transmitted from the service multiplexer 100, becomes smaller than K Mbps.
[66] For example, since the pre-processor of the transmitter performs an encoding process on the mobile service data at a coding rate of at least 1/2, the amount of the data outputted from the pre-processor is increased to more than twice the amount of the data initially inputted to the pre-processor. Therefore, the sum of the data rate of the main service data and the data rate of the mobile service data, both being multiplexed by the service multiplexer 100, becomes either equal to or smaller than 19.39 Mbps. Therefore, in order to match the data rate of the data that are finally outputted from the service multiplexer 100 to a constant data rate (e.g., 19.39 Mbps), an amount of null data packets corresponding to the amount of lacking data rate is generated from the null packet generator 140 and outputted to the mobile service multiplexer 150.
[67] Accordingly, the mobile service multiplexer 150 encapsulates each of the mobile service data and the PSFPSIP table data that are being inputted to a MPEG-2 TS packet form. Then, the above-described TS packets are multiplexed with the null data packets and, then, outputted to the TS packet multiplexer 162. Thereafter, the TS packet multiplexer 162 multiplexes the main service data packet being outputted from the main service multiplexer 161 and the mobile service data packet being outputted from the mobile service multiplexer 150 and transmits the multiplexed data packets to the transmitter 200 at a data rate of 19.39 Mbps.
[68] According to an embodiment of the present invention, the mobile service multiplexer
150 receives the null data packets. However, this is merely exemplary and does not limit the scope of the present invention. In other words, according to another embodiment of the present invention, the TS packet multiplexer 162 may receive the null data packets, so as to match the data rate of the finally outputted data to a constant data rate. Herein, the output path and multiplexing rule of the null data packet is controlled by the controller 110. The controller 110 controls the multiplexing processed performed by the mobile service multiplexer 150, the main service multiplexer 161 of the transport multiplexer 160, and the TS packet multiplexer 162, and also controls the null data packet generation of the null packet generator 140. At this point, the transmitter 200 discards the null data packets transmitted from the service multiplexer 100 instead of transmitting the null data packets.
[69] Further, in order to allow the transmitter 200 to discard the null data packets transmitted from the service multiplexer 100 instead of transmitting them, identification information for identifying the null data packet is required. Herein, the identification information may use values pre-decided in accordance with an agreement between the transmitting system and the receiving system. For example, the value of the synchronization byte within the header of the null data packet may be modified so as to be used as the identification information. Alternatively, a transport_error _indicator flag may also be used as the identification information.
[70] In the description of the present invention, an example of using the transport_error_indicator flag as the identification information will be given to describe an embodiment of the present invention. In this case, the transport_error_indicator flag of the null data packet is set to T, and the transport_error_indicator flag of the remaining data packets are reset to '0', so as to identify the null data packet. More specifically, when the null packet generator 140 generates the null data packets, if the transport_error_indicator flag from the header field of the null data packet is set to T and then transmitted, the null data packet may be identified and, therefore, be discarded. In the present invention, any type of identification information for identifying the null data packets may be used. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited only to the examples set forth in the description of the present invention.
[71] According to another embodiment of the present invention, a transmission parameter may be included in at least a portion of the null data packet, or at least one table or an operations and maintenance (OM) packet (or OMP) of the PSI/PSIP table for the mobile service. In this case, the transmitter 200 extracts the transmission parameter and outputs the extracted transmission parameter to the corresponding block and also transmits the extracted parameter to the receiving system if required. More specifically, a packet referred to as an OMP is defined for the purpose of operating and managing the transmitting system. For example, the OMP is configured in accordance with the MPEG-2 TS packet format, and the corresponding PID is given the value of OxIFFA. The OMP is configured of a 4-byte header and a 184-byte pay load. Herein, among the 184 bytes, the first byte corresponds to an OM_type field, which indicates the type of the OM packet.
[72] In the present invention, the transmission parameter may be transmitted in the form of an OMP. And, in this case, among the values of the reserved fields within the OM_type field, a pre-arranged value is used, thereby indicating that the transmission parameter is being transmitted to the transmitter 200 in the form of an OMP. More spe- cifically, the transmitter 200 may find (or identify) the OMP by referring to the PID. Also, by parsing the OM_type field within the OMP, the transmitter 200 can verify whether a transmission parameter is included after the OM_type field of the corresponding packet. The transmission parameter corresponds to supplemental data required for processing mobile service data from the transmitting system and the receiving system.
[73] Herein, the transmission parameter may include data group information, region information within the data group, RS frame information, super frame information, burst information, turbo code information, and RS code information. The burst information may include burst size information, burst period information, and time information to next burst. The burst period signifies the period at which the burst transmitting the same mobile service is repeated. The data group includes a plurality of mobile service data packets, and a plurality of such data groups is gathered (or grouped) to form a burst. A burst section signifies the beginning of a current burst to the beginning of a next burst. Herein, the burst section is classified as a section that includes the data group (also referred to as a burst-on section), and a section that does not include the data group (also referred to as a burst-off section). A burst-on section is configured of a plurality of fields, wherein one field includes one data group.
[74] The transmission parameter may also include information on how signals of a symbol domain are encoded in order to transmit the mobile service data, and multiplexing information on how the main service data and the mobile service data or various types of mobile service data are multiplexed. The information included in the transmission parameter is merely exemplary to facilitate the understanding of the present invention. And, the adding and deleting of the information included in the transmission parameter may be easily modified and changed by anyone skilled in the art. Therefore, the present invention is not limited to the examples proposed in the description set forth herein. Furthermore, the transmission parameters may be provided from the service multiplexer 100 to the transmitter 200. Alternatively, the transmission parameters may also be set up by an internal controller (not shown) within the transmitter 200 or received from an external source.
[75]
[76] Transmitter
[77] FIG. 3 illustrates a block diagram showing an example of the transmitter 200 according to an embodiment of the present invention. Herein, the transmitter 200 includes a demultiplexer 210, a packet jitter mitigator 220, a pre-processor 230, a packet multiplexer 240, a post-processor 250, a synchronization (sync) multiplexer 260, and a transmission unit 270. Herein, when a data packet is received from the service multiplexer 100, the demultiplexer 210 should identify whether the received data packet corresponds to a main service data packet, a mobile service data packet, or a null data packet. For example, the demultiplexer 210 uses the PID within the received data packet so as to identify the main service data packet and the mobile service data packet. Then, the demultiplexer 210 uses a transport_error_indicator field to identify the null data packet. The main service data packet identified by the demultiplexer 210 is outputted to the packet jitter mitigator 220, the mobile service data packet is outputted to the pre-processor 230, and the null data packet is discarded. If a transmission parameter is included in the null data packet, then the transmission parameter is first extracted and outputted to the corresponding block. Thereafter, the null data packet is discarded.
[78] The pre-processor 230 performs an additional encoding process of the mobile service data included in the service data packet, which is demultiplexed and outputted from the demultiplexer 210. The pre-processor 230 also performs a process of configuring a data group so that the data group may be positioned at a specific place in accordance with the purpose of the data, which are to be transmitted on a transmission frame. This is to enable the mobile service data to respond swiftly and strongly against noise and channel changes. The pre-processor 230 may also refer to the transmission parameter when performing the additional encoding process. Also, the pre-processor 230 groups a plurality of mobile service data packets to configure a data group. Thereafter, known data, mobile service data, RS parity data, and MPEG header are allocated to predetermined areas within the data group.
[79]
[80] Pre-processor within transmitter
[81] FIG. 4 illustrates a block diagram showing an example of the pre-processor 230 according to the present invention. The pre-processor 230 includes a data randomizer 301, a RS frame encoder 302, a block processor 303, a group formatter 304, a data deinterleaver 305, a packet formatter 306. The data randomizer 301 within the above- described pre-processor 230 randomizes the mobile service data packet including the mobile service data that is inputted through the demultiplexer 210. Then, the data randomizer 301 outputs the randomized mobile service data packet to the RS frame encoder 302. At this point, since the data randomizer 301 performs the randomizing process on the mobile service data, the randomizing process that is to be performed by the data randomizer 251 of the post-processor 250 on the mobile service data may be omitted. The data randomizer 301 may also discard the synchronization byte within the mobile service data packet and perform the randomizing process. This is an option that may be chosen by the system designer. In the example given in the present invention, the randomizing process is performed without discarding the synchronization byte within the mobile service data packet. [82] The RS frame encoder 302 groups a plurality of mobile the synchronization byte within the mobile service data packets that is randomized and inputted, so as to create a RS frame. Then, the RS frame encoder 302 performs at least one of an error correction encoding process and an error detection encoding process in RS frame units. Accordingly, robustness may be provided to the mobile service data, thereby scattering group error that may occur during changes in a frequency environment, thereby enabling the enhanced data to respond to the frequency environment, which is extremely vulnerable and liable to frequent changes. Also, the RS frame encoder 302 groups a plurality of RS frame so as to create a super frame, thereby performing a row permutation process in super frame units. The row permutation process may also be referred to as a row interleaving process. Hereinafter, the process will be referred to as row permutation for simplicity.
[83] More specifically, when the RS frame encoder 302 performs the process of permuting each row of the super frame in accordance with a pre-determined rule, the position of the rows within the super frame before and after the row permutation process is changed. If the row permutation process is performed by super frame units, and even though the section having a plurality of errors occurring therein becomes very long, and even though the number of errors included in the RS frame, which is to be decoded, exceeds the extent of being able to be corrected, the errors become dispersed within the entire super frame. Thus, the decoding ability is even more enhanced as compared to a single RS frame.
[84] At this point, as an example of the present invention, RS-encoding is applied for the error correction encoding process, and a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) encoding is applied for the error detection process. When performing the RS-encoding, parity data that are used for the error correction are generated. And, when performing the CRC encoding, CRC data that are used for the error detection are generated. The RS encoding is one of forward error correction (FEC) methods. The FEC corresponds to a technique for compensating errors that occur during the transmission process. The CRC data generated by CRC encoding may be used for indicating whether or not the mobile service data have been damaged by the errors while being transmitted through the channel. In the present invention, a variety of error detection coding methods other than the CRC encoding method may be used, or the error correction coding method may be used to enhance the overall error correction ability of the receiving system. Herein, the RS frame encoder 302 refers to a pre-determined transmission parameter and/or the transmission parameter provided from the service multiplexer 100 so as to perform operations including RS frame configuration, RS encoding, CRC encoding, super frame configuration, and row permutation in super frame units.
[85] [86] RS frame encoder within Pre-processor
[87] FIG. 5(a) to FIG. 5(e) illustrate error correction encoding and error detection encoding processed according to an embodiment of the present invention. More specifically, the RS frame encoder 302 first divides the inputted mobile service data bytes to units of a predetermined length. The predetermined length is decided by the system designer. And, in the example of the present invention, the predetermined length is equal to 187 bytes, and, therefore, the 187-byte unit will be referred to as a packet for simplicity. For example, when the mobile service data that are being inputted, as shown in FIG. 5(a), correspond to a MPEG transport packet stream configured of 188-byte units, the first synchronization byte is removed, as shown in FIG. 5(b), so as to configure a 187-byte unit. Herein, the synchronization byte is removed because each mobile service data packet has the same value.
[88] Herein, the process of removing the synchronization byte may be performed during a randomizing process of the data randomizer 301 in an earlier process. In this case, the process of the removing the synchronization byte by the RS frame encoder 302 may be omitted. Moreover, when adding synchronization bytes from the receiving system, the process may be performed by the data derandomizer instead of the RS frame decoder. Therefore, if a removable fixed byte (e.g., synchronization byte) does not exist within the mobile service data packet that is being inputted to the RS frame encoder 302, or if the mobile service data that are being inputted are not configured in a packet format, the mobile service data that are being inputted are divided into 187-byte units, thereby configuring a packet for each 187-byte unit.
[89] Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5(c), N number of packets configured of 187 bytes is grouped to configure a RS frame. At this point, the RS frame is configured as a RS frame having the size of N(row)*187(column) bytes, in which 187-byte packets are sequentially inputted in a row direction. In order to simplify the description of the present invention, the RS frame configured as described above will also be referred to as a first RS frame. More specifically, only pure mobile service data are included in the first RS frame, which is the same as the structure configured of 187 N-byte rows. Thereafter, the mobile service data within the RS frame are divided into an equal size. Then, when the divided mobile service data are transmitted in the same order as the input order for configuring the RS frame, and when one or more errors have occurred at a particular point during the transmitting/receiving process, the errors are clustered (or gathered) within the RS frame as well. In this case, the receiving system uses a RS erasure decoding method when performing error correction decoding, thereby enhancing the error correction ability. At this point, the N number of columns within the N number of RS frame includes 187 bytes, as shown in FIG. 5(c).
[90] In this case, a (Nc5Kc)-RS encoding process is performed on each column, so as to generate Nc-Kc(=P) number of parity bytes. Then, the newly generated P number of parity bytes is added after the very last byte of the corresponding column, thereby creating a column of (187+P) bytes. Herein, as shown in FIG. 5(c), Kc is equal to 187 (i.e., Kc=187), and Nc is equal to 187+P (i.e., Nc=187+P). For example, when P is equal to 48, (235,187)-RS encoding process is performed so as to create a column of 235 bytes. When such RS encoding process is performed on all N number of columns, as shown in FIG. 5(c), a RS frame having the size of N(row)*(187+P)(column) bytes may be created, as shown in FIG. 5(d). In order to simplify the description of the present invention, the RS frame having the RS parity inserted therein will be referred to as s second RS frame. More specifically, the second RS frame having the structure of (187+P) rows configured of N bytes may be configured.
[91] As shown in FIG. 5(c) or FIG. 5(d), each row of the RS frame is configured of N bytes. However, depending upon channel conditions between the transmitting system and the receiving system, error may be included in the RS frame. When errors occur as described above, CRC data (or CRC code or CRC checksum) may be used on each row unit in order to verify whether error exists in each row unit. The RS frame encoder 302 may perform CRC encoding on the mobile service data being RS encoded so as to create (or generate) the CRC data. The CRC data being generated by CRC encoding may be used to indicate whether the mobile service data have been damaged while being transmitted through the channel.
[92] The present invention may also use different error detection encoding methods other than the CRC encoding method. Alternatively, the present invention may use the error correction encoding method to enhance the overall error correction ability of the receiving system. FIG. 5(e) illustrates an example of using a 2-byte (i.e., 16-bit) CRC checksum as the CRC data. Herein, a 2-byte CRC checksum is generated for N number of bytes of each row, thereby adding the 2-byte CRC checksum at the end of the N number of bytes. Thus, each row is expanded to (N+2) number of bytes. Equation 1 below corresponds to an exemplary equation for generating a 2-byte CRC checksum for each row being configured of N number of bytes.
[93] Equation 1
[94]
16 12 5 g(x) = x + x + x + 1
[95] The process of adding a 2-byte checksum in each row is only exemplary. Therefore, the present invention is not limited only to the example proposed in the description set forth herein. In order to simplify the understanding of the present invention, the RS frame having the RS parity and CRC checksum added therein will hereinafter be referred to as a third RS frame. More specifically, the third RS frame corresponds to (187+P) number of rows each configured of (N+2) number of bytes. As described above, when the process of RS encoding and CRC encoding are completed, the (N*187)-byte RS frame is expanded to a (N+2)*(187+P)-byte RS frame. Furthermore, the RS frame that is expanded, as shown in FIG. 5(e), is inputted to the block processor 303.
[96] As described above, the mobile service data encoded by the RS frame encoder 302 are inputted to the block processor 303. The block processor 303 then encodes the inputted mobile service data at a coding rate of G/H (wherein, G is smaller than H (i.e., G<H)) and then outputted to the group formatter 304. More specifically, the block processor 303 divides the mobile service data being inputted in byte units into bit units. Then, the G number of bits is encoded to H number of bits. Thereafter, the encoded bits are converted back to byte units and then outputted. For example, if 1 bit of the input data is coded to 2 bits and outputted, then G is equal to 1 and H is equal to 2 (i.e., G=I and H=T). Alternatively, if 1 bit of the input data is coded to 4 bits and outputted, then G is equal to 1 and H is equal to 4 (i.e., G=I and H=4). Hereinafter, the former coding rate will be referred to as a coding rate of 1/2 (1/2-rate coding), and the latter coding rate will be referred to as a coding rate of 1/4 (1/4-rate coding), for simplicity.
[97] Herein, when using the 1/4 coding rate, the coding efficiency is greater than when using the 1/2 coding rate, and may, therefore, provide greater and enhanced error correction ability. For such reason, when it is assumed that the data encoded at a 1/4 coding rate in the group formatter 304, which is located near the end portion of the system, are allocated to an area in which the receiving performance may be deteriorated, and that the data encoded at a 1/2 coding rate are allocated to an area having excellent receiving performance, the difference in performance may be reduced. At this point, the block processor 303 may also receive signaling information including transmission parameters. Herein, the signaling information may also be processed with either 1/2-rate coding or 1/4-rate coding as in the step of processing mobile service data. Thereafter, the signaling information is also considered the same as the mobile service data and processed accordingly.
[98] Meanwhile, the group formatter inserts mobile service data that are outputted from the block processor 303 in corresponding areas within a data group, which is configured in accordance with a pre-defined rule. Also, with respect to the data dein- terleaving process, each place holder or known data (or known data place holders) are also inserted in corresponding areas within the data group. At this point, the data group may be divided into at least one hierarchical area. Herein, the type of mobile service data being inserted in each area may vary depending upon the characteristics of each hierarchical area. Additionally, each area may, for example, be divided based upon the receiving performance within the data group. Furthermore, one data group may be configured to include a set of field synchronization data.
[99] In an example given in the present invention, a data group is divided into A, B, and C regions in a data configuration prior to data deinterleaving. At this point, the group formatter 304 allocates the mobile service data, which are inputted after being RS encoded and block encoded, to each of the corresponding regions by referring to the transmission parameter. FIG. 6 illustrates an alignment of data after being data interleaved and identified, and FIG. 7 illustrates an alignment of data before being data interleaved and identified. More specifically, a data structure identical to that shown in FIG. 6 is transmitted to a receiving system. Also, the data group configured to have the same structure as the data structure shown in FIG. 6 is inputted to the data dein- terleaver 305.
[100] As described above, FIG. 6 illustrates a data structure prior to data deinterleaving that is divided into 3 regions, such as region A, region B, and region C. Also, in the present invention, each of the regions A to C is further divided into a plurality of regions. Referring to FIG. 6, region A is divided into 5 regions (Al to A5), region B is divided into 2 regions (Bl and B2), and region C is divided into 3 regions (Cl to C3). Herein, regions A to C are identified as regions having similar receiving performances within the data group. Herein, the type of mobile service data, which are inputted, may also vary depending upon the characteristic of each region.
[101] In the example of the present invention, the data structure is divided into regions A to C based upon the level of interference of the main service data. Herein, the data group is divided into a plurality of regions to be used for different purposes. More specifically, a region of the main service data having no interference or a very low interference level may be considered to have a more resistant (or stronger) receiving performance as compared to regions having higher interference levels. Additionally, when using a system inserting and transmitting known data in the data group, and when consecutively long known data are to be periodically inserted in the mobile service data, the known data having a predetermined length may be periodically inserted in the region having no interference from the main service data (e.g., region A). However, due to interference from the main service data, it is difficult to periodically insert known data and also to insert consecutively long known data to a region having interference from the main service data (e.g., region B and region C).
[102] Hereinafter, examples of allocating data to region A (Al to A5), region B (Bl and B2), and region C (Cl to C3) will now be described in detail with reference to FIG. 6. The data group size, the number of hierarchically divided regions within the data group and the size of each region, and the number of mobile service data bytes that can be inserted in each hierarchically divided region of FIG. 6 are merely examples given to facilitate the understanding of the present invention. Herein, the group formatter 304 creates a data group including places in which field synchronization data bytes are to be inserted, so as to create the data group that will hereinafter be described in detail.
[103] More specifically, region A is a region within the data group in which a long known data sequence may be periodically inserted, and in which includes regions wherein the main service data are not mixed (e.g., Al to A5). Also, region A includes a region (e.g., Al) located between a field synchronization region and the region in which the first known data sequence is to be inserted. The field synchronization region has the length of one segment (i.e., 832 symbols) existing in an ATSC system.
[104] For example, referring to FIG. 6, 2428 bytes of the mobile service data may be inserted in region Al, 2580 bytes may be inserted in region A2, 2772 bytes may be inserted in region A3, 2472 bytes may be inserted in region A4, and 2772 bytes may be inserted in region A5. Herein, trellis initialization data or known data, MPEG header, and RS parity are not included in the mobile service data. As described above, when region A includes a known data sequence at both ends, the receiving system uses channel information that can obtain known data or field synchronization data, so as to perform equalization, thereby providing enforced equalization performance.
[105] Also, region B includes a region located within 8 segments at the beginning of a field synchronization region within the data group (chronologically placed before region Al) (e.g., region Bl), and a region located within 8 segments behind the very last known data sequence which is inserted in the data group (e.g., region B2). For example, 930 bytes of the mobile service data may be inserted in the region Bl, and 1350 bytes may be inserted in region B2. Similarly, trellis initialization data or known data, MPEG header, and RS parity are not included in the mobile service data. In case of region B, the receiving system may perform equalization by using channel information obtained from the field synchronization region. Alternatively, the receiving system may also perform equalization by using channel information that may be obtained from the last known data sequence, thereby enabling the system to respond to the channel changes.
[106] Region C includes a region located within 30 segments including and preceding the 9 th segment of the field synchronization region (chronologically located before region A) (e.g., region Cl), a region located within 12 segments including and following the 9 th segment of the very last known data sequence within the data group (chronologically located after region A) (e.g., region C2), and a region located in 32 segments after the region C2 (e.g., region C3). For example, 1272 bytes of the mobile service data may be inserted in the region Cl, 1560 bytes may be inserted in region C2, and 1312 bytes may be inserted in region C3. Similarly, trellis initialization data or known data, MPEG header, and RS parity are not included in the mobile service data. Herein, region C (e.g., region Cl) is located chronologically earlier than (or before) region A. [107] Since region C (e.g., region Cl) is located further apart from the field synchronization region which corresponds to the closest known data region, the receiving system may use the channel information obtained from the field synchronization data when performing channel equalization. Alternatively, the receiving system may also use the most recent channel information of a previous data group. Furthermore, in region C (e.g., region C2 and region C3) located before region A, the receiving system may use the channel information obtained from the last known data sequence to perform equalization. However, when the channels are subject to fast and frequent changes, the equalization may not be performed perfectly. Therefore, the equalization performance of region C may be deteriorated as compared to that of region B.
[108] When it is assumed that the data group is allocated with a plurality of hierarchically divided regions, as described above, the block processor 303 may encode the mobile service data, which are to be inserted to each region based upon the characteristic of each hierarchical region, at a different coding rate. For example, the block processor 303 may encode the mobile service data, which are to be inserted in regions Al to A5 of region A, at a coding rate of 1/2. Then, the group formatter 304 may insert the 1/2-rate encoded mobile service data to regions Al to A5.
[109] The block processor 303 may encode the mobile service data, which are to be inserted in regions B 1 and B2 of region B, at a coding rate of 1/4 having higher error correction ability as compared to the 1/2-coding rate. Then, the group formatter 304 inserts the 1/4-rate coded mobile service data in region B 1 and region B2. Furthermore, the block processor 303 may encode the mobile service data, which are to be inserted in regions Cl to C3 of region C, at a coding rate of 1/4 or a coding rate having higher error correction ability than the 1/4-coding rate. Then, the group formatter 304 may either insert the encoded mobile service data to regions Cl to C3, as described above, or leave the data in a reserved region for future usage.
[110] In addition, the group formatter 304 also inserts supplemental data, such as signaling information that notifies the overall transmission information, other than the mobile service data in the data group. Also, apart from the encoded mobile service data outputted from the block processor 303, the group formatter 304 also inserts MPEG header place holders, non-systematic RS parity place holders, main service data place holders, which are related to data deinterleaving in a later process, as shown in FIG. 6. Herein, the main service data place holders are inserted because the mobile service data bytes and the main service data bytes are alternately mixed with one another in regions B and C based upon the input of the data deinterleaver, as shown in FIG. 6. For example, based upon the data outputted after data deinterleaving, the place holder for the MPEG header may be allocated at the very beginning of each packet.
[I l l] Furthermore, the group formatter 304 either inserts known data generated in ac- cordance with a pre-determined method or inserts known data place holders for inserting the known data in a later process. Additionally, place holders for initializing the trellis encoding module 256 are also inserted in the corresponding regions. For example, the initialization data place holders may be inserted in the beginning of the known data sequence. Herein, the size of the mobile service data that can be inserted in a data group may vary in accordance with the sizes of the trellis initialization place holders or known data (or known data place holders), MPEG header place holders, and RS parity place holders.
[112] The output of the group formatter 304 is inputted to the data deinterleaver 305. And, the data deinterleaver 305 deinterleaves data by performing an inverse process of the data interleaver on the data and place holders within the data group, which are then outputted to the packet formatter 306. More specifically, when the data and place holders within the data group configured, as shown in FIG. 6, are deinterleaved by the data deinterleaver 305, the data group being outputted to the packet formatter 306 is configured to have the structure shown in FIG. 7.
[113] The packet formatter 306 removes the main service data place holders and the RS parity place holders that were allocated for the deinterleaving process from the deinterleaved data being inputted. Then, the packet formatter 306 groups the remaining portion and replaces the 4-byte MPEG header place holder with an MPEG header having a null packet PID (or an unused PID from the main service data packet). Also, when the group formatter 304 inserts known data place holders, the packet formatter 306 may insert actual known data in the known data place holders, or may directly output the known data place holders without any modification in order to make replacement insertion in a later process. Thereafter, the packet formatter 306 identifies the data within the packet- formatted data group, as described above, as a 188-byte unit mobile service data packet (i.e., MPEG TS packet), which is then provided to the packet multiplexer 240.
[114] The packet multiplexer 240 multiplexes the mobile service data packet outputted from the pre-processor 230 and the main service data packet outputted from the packet jitter mitigator 220 in accordance with a pre-defined multiplexing method. Then, the packet multiplexer 240 outputs the multiplexed data packets to the data randomizer 251 of the post-processor 250. Herein, the multiplexing method may vary in accordance with various variables of the system design. One of the multiplexing methods of the packet formatter 240 consists of providing a burst section along a time axis, and, then, transmitting a plurality of data groups during a burst-on section within the burst section, and transmitting only the main service data during the burst-off section within the burst section. Herein, the burst section indicates the section starting from the beginning of the current burst until the beginning of the next burst. [115] At this point, the main service data may be transmitted during the burst-on section. The packet multiplexer 240 refers to the transmission parameter, such as information on the burst size or the burst period, so as to be informed of the number of data groups and the period of the data groups included in a single burst. Herein, the mobile service data and the main service data may co-exist in the burst-on section, and only the main service data may exist in the burst-off section. Therefore, a main data service section transmitting the main service data may exist in both burst-on and burst-off sections. At this point, the main data service section within the burst-on section and the number of main data service packets included in the burst-off section may either be different from one another or be the same.
[116] When the mobile service data are transmitted in a burst structure, in the receiving system receiving only the mobile service data turns the power on only during the burst section, thereby receiving the corresponding data. Alternatively, in the section transmitting only the main service data, the power is turned off so that the main service data are not received in this section. Thus, the power consumption of the receiving system may be reduced.
[117]
[118] Detailed embodiments of the RS frame structure and packet multiplexing
[119] Hereinafter, detailed embodiments of the pre-processor 230 and the packet multiplexer 240 will now be described. According to an embodiment of the present invention, the N value corresponding to the length of a row, which is included in the RS frame that is configured by the RS frame encoder 302, is set to 538. Accordingly, the RS frame encoder 302 receives 538 transport stream (TS) packets so as to configure a first RS frame having the size of 538*187 bytes. Thereafter, as described above, the first RS frame is processed with a (235,187)-RS encoding process so as to configure a second RS frame having the size of 538*235 bytes. Finally, the second RS frame is processed with generating a 16-bit checksum so as to configure a third RS frame having the sizes of 540*235.
[120] Meanwhile, as shown in FIG. 6, the sum of the number of bytes of regions Al to A5 of region A, in which 1/2-rate encoded mobile service data are to be inserted, among the plurality of regions within the data group is equal to 13024 bytes (=2428+2580+2772+2472+2772 bytes). Herein, the number of byte prior to performing the 1/2-rate encoding process is equal to 6512 (=13024/2). On the other hand, the sum of the number of bytes of regions B 1 and B2 of region B, in which 1/4-rate encoded mobile service data are to be inserted, among the plurality of regions within the data group is equal to 2280 bytes (=930+1350 bytes). Herein, the number of byte prior to performing the 1/4-rate encoding process is equal to 570 (=2280/4).
[121] In other words, when 7082 bytes of mobile service data are inputted to the block processor 303, 6512 byte are expanded to 13024 bytes by being 1/2-rate encoded, and 570 bytes are expanded to 2280 bytes by being 1/4-rate encoded. Thereafter, the block processor 303 inserts the mobile service data expanded to 13024 bytes in regions Al to A5 of region A and, also, inserts the mobile service data expanded to 2280 bytes in regions B 1 and B2 of region B. Herein, the 7082 bytes of mobile service data being inputted to the block processor 303 may be divided into an output of the RS frame encoder 302 and signaling information. In the present invention, among the 7082 bytes of mobile service data, 7050 bytes correspond to the output of the RS frame encoder 302, and the remaining 32 bytes correspond to the signaling information data. Then, 1/2-rate encoding or 1/4-rate encoding is performed on the corresponding data bytes.
[122] Meanwhile, a RS frame being processed with RS encoding and CRC encoding from the RS frame encoder 302 is configured of 540*235 bytes, in other words, 126900 bytes. The 126900 bytes are divided by 7050-byte units along the time axis, so as to produce 18 7050-byte units. Thereafter, a 32-byte unit of signaling information data is added to the 7050-byte unit mobile service data being outputted from the RS frame encoder 302. Subsequently, the RS frame encoder 302 performs 1/2-rate encoding or 1/4-rate encoding on the corresponding data bytes, which are then outputted to the group formatter 304. Accordingly, the group formatter 304 inserts the 1/2-rate encoded data in region A and the 1/4-rate encoded data in region B.
[123] The process of deciding an N value that is required for configuring the RS frame from the RS frame encoder 302 will now be described in detail. More specifically, the size of the final RS frame (i.e., the third RS frame), which is RS encoded and CRC encoded from the RS frame encoder 302, which corresponds to (N+2)*235 bytes should be allocated to X number of groups, wherein X is an integer. Herein, in a single data group, 7050 data bytes prior to being encoded are allocated. Therefore, if the (N+2)*235 bytes are set to be the exact multiple of 7050(=30*235), the output data of the RS frame encoder 302 may be efficiently allocated to the data group. According to an embodiment of the present invention, the value of N is decided so that (N+2) becomes a multiple of 30. For example, in the present invention, N is equal to 538, and (N+2) (=540) divided by 30 is equal to 18. This indicates that the mobile service data within one RS frame are processed with either 1/2-rate encoding or 1/4-rate encoding. The encoded mobile service data are then allocated to 18 data groups.
[124] FIG. 8 illustrates a process of dividing the RS frame according to the present invention. More specifically, the RS frame having the size of (N+2)*235 is divided into 30*235 byte blocks. Then, the divided blocks are mapped to a single group. In other words, the data of a block having the size of 30*235 bytes are processed with one of a 1/2-rate encoding process and a 1/4-rate encoding process and are, then, inserted in a data group. Thereafter, the data group having corresponding data and place holders inserted in each hierarchical region divided by the group formatter 304 passes through the data deinterleaver 305 and the packet formatter 306 so as to be inputted to the packet multiplexer 240.
[125] FIG. 9 illustrates exemplary operations of a packet multiplexer for transmitting the data group according to the present invention. More specifically, the packet multiplexer 240 multiplexes a field including a data group, in which the mobile service data and main service data are mixed with one another, and a field including only the main service data. Thereafter, the packet multiplexer 240 outputs the multiplexed fields to the data randomizer 251. At this point, in order to transmit the RS frame having the size of 540*235 bytes, 18 data groups should be transmitted. Herein, each data group includes field synchronization data, as shown in FIG. 6. Therefore, the 18 data groups are transmitted during 18 field sections, and the section during which the 18 data groups are being transmitted corresponds to the burst-on section.
[126] In each field within the burst-on section, a data group including field synchronization data is multiplexed with main service data, which are then outputted. For example, in the embodiment of the present invention, in each field within the burst-on section, a data group having the size of 118 segments is multiplexed with a set of main service data having the size of 194 segments. Referring to FIG. 9, during the burst-on section (i.e., during the 18 field sections), a field including 18 data groups is transmitted. Then, during the burst-off section that follows (i.e., during the 12 field sections), a field consisting only of the main service data is transmitted. Subsequently, during a subsequent burst-on section, 18 fields including 18 data groups are transmitted. And, during the following burst-off section, 12 fields consisting only of the main service data are transmitted.
[127] Furthermore, in the present invention, the same type of data service may be provided in the first burst-on section including the first 18 data groups and in the second burst- on section including the next 18 data groups. Alternatively, different types of data service may be provided in each burst-on section. For example, when it is assumed that different data service types are provided to each of the first burst-on section and the second burst-on section, and that the receiving system wishes to receive only one type of data service, the receiving system turns the power on only during the corresponding burst-on section including the desired data service type so as to receive the corresponding 18 data fields. Then, the receiving system turns the power off during the remaining 42 field sections so as to prevent other data service types from being received. Thus, the amount of power consumption of the receiving system may be reduced. In addition, the receiving system according to the present invention is advantageous in that one RS frame may be configured from the 18 data groups that are received during a single burst-on section. [128] According to the present invention, the number of data groups included in a burst-on section may vary based upon the size of the RS frame, and the size of the RS frame varies in accordance with the value N. More specifically, by adjusting the value N, the number of data groups within the burst section may be adjusted. Herein, in an example of the present invention, the (235,187)-RS encoding process adjusts the value N during a fixed state. Furthermore, the size of the mobile service data that can be inserted in the data group may vary based upon the sizes of the trellis initialization data or known data, the MPEG header, and the RS parity, which are inserted in the corresponding data group.
[129] Meanwhile, since a data group including mobile service data in-between the data bytes of the main service data during the packet multiplexing process, the shifting of the chronological position (or place) of the main service data packet becomes relative. Also, a system object decoder (i.e., MPEG decoder) for processing the main service data of the receiving system, receives and decodes only the main service data and recognizes the mobile service data packet as a null data packet. Therefore, when the system object decoder of the receiving system receives a main service data packet that is multiplexed with the data group, a packet jitter occurs.
[130] At this point, since a multiple-level buffer for the video data exists in the system object decoder and the size of the buffer is relatively large, the packet jitter generated from the packet multiplexer 240 does not cause any serious problem in case of the video data. However, since the size of the buffer for the audio data is relatively small, the packet jitter may cause considerable problem. More specifically, due to the packet jitter, an overflow or underflow may occur in the buffer for the main service data of the receiving system (e.g., the buffer for the audio data). Therefore, the packet jitter mitigator 220 re-adjusts the relative position of the main service data packet so that the overflow or underflow does not occur in the system object decoder.
[131] In the present invention, examples of repositioning places for the audio data packets within the main service data in order to minimize the influence on the operations of the audio buffer will be described in detail. The packet jitter mitigator 220 repositions the audio data packets in the main service data section so that the audio data packets of the main service data can be as equally and uniformly aligned and positioned as possible. The standard for repositioning the audio data packets in the main service data performed by the packet jitter mitigator 220 will now be described. Herein, it is assumed that the packet jitter mitigator 220 knows the same multiplexing information as that of the packet multiplexer 240, which is placed further behind the packet jitter mitigator 220.
[132] Firstly, if one audio data packet exists in the main service data section (e.g., the main service data section positioned between two data groups) within the burst-on section, the audio data packet is positioned at the very beginning of the main service data section. Alternatively, if two audio data packets exist in the corresponding data section, one audio data packet is positioned at the very beginning and the other audio data packet is positioned at the very end of the main service data section. Further, if more than three audio data packets exist, one audio data packet is positioned at the very beginning of the main service data section, another is positioned at the very end of the main service data section, and the remaining audio data packets are equally positioned between the first and last audio data packets. Secondly, during the main service data section placed immediately before the beginning of a burst-on section (i.e., during a burst-off section), the audio data packet is placed at the very end of the corresponding section.
[133] Thirdly, during a main service data section within the burst-off section after the burst-on section, the audio data packet is positioned at the very end of the main service data section. Finally, the data packets other than audio data packets are positioned in accordance with the inputted order in vacant spaces (i.e., spaces that are not designated for the audio data packets). Meanwhile, when the positions of the main service data packets are relatively re-adjusted, associated program clock reference (PCR) values may also be modified accordingly. The PCR value corresponds to a time reference value for synchronizing the time of the MPEG decoder. Herein, the PCR value is inserted in a specific region of a TS packet and then transmitted.
[134] In the example of the present invention, the packet jitter mitigator 220 also performs the operation of modifying the PCR value. The output of the packet jitter mitigator 220 is inputted to the packet multiplexer 240. As described above, the packet multiplexer 240 multiplexes the main service data packet outputted from the packet jitter mitigator 220 with the mobile service data packet outputted from the pre-processor 230 into a burst structure in accordance with a pre-determined multiplexing rule. Then, the packet multiplexer 240 outputs the multiplexed data packets to the data randomizer 251 of the post-processor 250.
[135] If the inputted data correspond to the main service data packet, the data randomizer 251 performs the same randomizing process as that of the conventional randomizer. More specifically, the synchronization byte within the main service data packet is deleted. Then, the remaining 187 data bytes are randomized by using a pseudo random byte generated from the data randomizer 251. Thereafter, the randomized data are outputted to the RS encoder/non- systematic RS encoder 252.
[136] On the other hand, if the inputted data correspond to the mobile service data packet, the data randomizer 251 may randomize only a portion of the data packet. For example, if it is assumed that a randomizing process has already been performed in advance on the mobile service data packet by the pre-processor 230, the data randomizer 251 deletes the synchronization byte from the 4-byte MPEG header included in the mobile service data packet and, then, performs the randomizing process only on the remaining 3 data bytes of the MPEG header. Thereafter, the randomized data bytes are outputted to the RS encoder/non-systematic RS encoder 252. More specifically, the randomizing process is not performed on the remaining portion of the mobile service data excluding the MPEG header. In other words, the remaining portion of the mobile service data packet is directly outputted to the RS encoder/ non-systematic RS encoder 252 without being randomized. Also, the data randomizer 251 may or may not perform a randomizing process on the known data (or known data place holders) and the initialization data place holders included in the mobile service data packet.
[137] The RS encoder/non-systematic RS encoder 252 performs an RS encoding process on the data being randomized by the data randomizer 251 or on the data bypassing the data randomizer 251, so as to add 20 bytes of RS parity data. Thereafter, the processed data are outputted to the data interleaver 253. Herein, if the inputted data correspond to the main service data packet, the RS encoder/non- systematic RS encoder 252 performs the same systematic RS encoding process as that of the conventional broadcasting system, thereby adding the 20-byte RS parity data at the end of the 187-byte data. Alternatively, if the inputted data correspond to the mobile service data packet, the RS encoder/non-systematic RS encoder 252 performs a non- systematic RS encoding process. At this point, the 20-byte RS parity data obtained from the non- systematic RS encoding process are inserted in a pre-decided parity byte place within the mobile service data packet.
[138] The data interleaver 253 corresponds to a byte unit convolutional interleaver. The output of the data interleaver 253 is inputted to the parity replacer 254 and to the non- systematic RS encoder 255. Meanwhile, a process of initializing a memory within the trellis encoding module 256 is primarily required in order to decide the output data of the trellis encoding module 256, which is located after the parity replacer 254, as the known data pre-defined according to an agreement between the receiving system and the transmitting system. More specifically, the memory of the trellis encoding module 256 should first be initialized before the received known data sequence is trellis- encoded. At this point, the beginning portion of the known data sequence that is received corresponds to the initialization data place holder and not to the actual known data. Herein, the initialization data place holder has been included in the data by the group formatter within the pre-processor 230 in an earlier process. Therefore, the process of generating initialization data and replacing the initialization data place holder of the corresponding memory with the generated initialization data are required to be performed immediately before the inputted known data sequence is trellis- encoded.
[139] Additionally, a value of the trellis memory initialization data is decided and generated based upon a memory status of the trellis encoding module 256. Further, due to the newly replaced initialization data, a process of newly calculating the RS parity and replacing the RS parity, which is outputted from the data interleaver 253, with the newly calculated RS parity is required. Therefore, the non-systematic RS encoder 255 receives the mobile service data packet including the initialization data place holders, which are to be replaced with the actual initialization data, from the data interleaver 253 and also receives the initialization data from the trellis encoding module 256.
[140] Among the inputted mobile service data packet, the initialization data place holders are replaced with the initialization data, and the RS parity data that are added to the mobile service data packet are removed and processed with non-systematic RS encoding. Thereafter, the new RS parity obtained by performing the non-systematic RS encoding process is outputted to the parity replacer 255. Accordingly, the parity replacer 255 selects the output of the data interleaver 253 as the data within the mobile service data packet, and the parity replacer 255 selects the output of the non-systematic RS encoder 255 as the RS parity. The selected data are then outputted to the trellis encoding module 256.
[141] Meanwhile, if the main service data packet is inputted or if the mobile service data packet, which does not include any initialization data place holders that are to be replaced, is inputted, the parity replacer 254 selects the data and RS parity that are outputted from the data interleaver 253. Then, the parity replacer 254 directly outputs the selected data to the trellis encoding module 256 without any modification. The trellis encoding module 256 converts the byte-unit data to symbol units and performs a 12-way interleaving process so as to trellis -encode the received data. Thereafter, the processed data are outputted to the synchronization multiplexer 260.
[142] The synchronization multiplexer 260 inserts a field synchronization signal and a segment synchronization signal to the data outputted from the trellis encoding module 256 and, then, outputs the processed data to the pilot inserter 271 of the transmission unit 270. Herein, the data having a pilot inserted therein by the pilot inserter 271 are modulated by the modulator 272 in accordance with a pre-determined modulating method (e.g., a VSB method). Thereafter, the modulated data are transmitted to each receiving system though the radio frequency (RF) up-converter 273.
[143]
[144] Block processor
[145] FIG. 10 illustrates a block diagram showing a structure of a block processor according to the present invention. Herein, the block processor includes a byte-bit converter 401, a symbol encoder 402, a symbol interleaver 403, and a symbol-byte converter 404. The byte-bit converter 401 divides the mobile service data bytes that are inputted from the RS frame encoder 112 into bits, which are then outputted to the symbol encoder 402. The byte-bit converter 401 may also receive signaling information including transmission parameters. The signaling information data bytes are also divided into bits so as to be outputted to the symbol encoder 402. Herein, the signaling information including transmission parameters may be processed with the same data processing step as that of the mobile service data. More specifically, the signaling information may be inputted to the block processor 303 by passing through the data randomizer 301 and the RS frame encoder 302. Alternatively, the signaling information may also be directly outputted to the block processor 303 without passing though the data randomizer 301 and the RS frame encoder 302.
[146] The symbol encoder 402 corresponds to a G/H-rate encoder encoding the inputted data from G bits to H bits and outputting the data encoded at the coding rate of G/H. According to the embodiment of the present invention, it is assumed that the symbol encoder 402 performs either a coding rate of 1/2 (also referred to as a 1/2-rate encoding process) or an encoding process at a coding rate of 1/4 (also referred to as a 1/4-rate encoding process). The symbol encoder 402 performs one of 1/2-rate encoding and 1/4-rate encoding on the inputted mobile service data and signaling information. Thereafter, the signaling information is also recognized as the mobile service data and processed accordingly.
[147] In case of performing the 1/2-rate coding process, the symbol encoder 402 receives 1 bit and encodes the received 1 bit to 2 bits (i.e., 1 symbol). Then, the symbol encoder 402 outputs the processed 2 bits (or 1 symbol). On the other hand, in case of performing the 1/4-rate encoding process, the symbol encoder 402 receives 1 bit and encodes the received 1 bit to 4 bits (i.e., 2 symbols). Then, the symbol encoder 402 outputs the processed 4 bits (or 2 symbols).
[148] FIG. 11 illustrates a detailed block diagram of the symbol encoder 402 shown in FIG. 10. The symbol encoder 402 includes two delay units 501 and 503 and three adders 502, 504, and 505. Herein, the symbol encoder 402 encodes an input data bit U and outputs the coded bit U to 4 bits (uθ to u4). At this point, the data bit U is directly outputted as uppermost bit u0 and simultaneously encoded as lower bit ulu2u3 and then outputted. More specifically, the input data bit U is directly outputted as the uppermost bit u0 and simultaneously outputted to the first and third adders 502 and 505. The first adder 502 adds the input data bit U and the output bit of the first delay unit 501 and, then, outputs the added bit to the second delay unit 503. Then, the data bit delayed by a pre-determined time (e.g., by 1 clock) in the second delay unit 503 is outputted as lower bit ul and simultaneously fed-back to the first delay unit 501. The first delay unit 501 delays the data bit fed-back from the second delay unit 503 by a pre-determined time (e.g., by 1 clock). Then, the first delay unit 501 outputs the delayed data bit to the first adder 502 and the second adder 504. The second adder 504 adds the data bits outputted from the first and second delay units 501 and 503 as a lower bit u2. The third adder 505 adds the input data bit U and the output of the second delay unit 503 and outputs the added data bit as a lower bit u3.
[149] At this point, if the input data bit U corresponds to data encoded at a 1/2-coding rate, the symbol encoder 402 configures a symbol with uluO bits from the 4 output bits uθulu2u3. Then, the symbol encoder 402 outputs the newly configured symbol. Alternatively, if the input data bit U corresponds to data encoded at a 1/4-coding rate, the symbol encoder 402 configures and outputs a symbol with bits uluO and, then, configures and outputs another symbol with bits u2u3. According to another embodiment of the present invention, if the input data bit U corresponds to data encoded at a 1/4-coding rate, the symbol encoder 402 may also configure and output a symbol with bits uluO, and then repeat the process once again and output the corresponding bits. According to yet another embodiment of the present invention, the symbol encoder outputs all four output bits U uθulu2u3. Then, when using the 1/2-coding rate, the symbol interleaver 403 located behind the symbol encoder 402 selects only the symbol configured of bits uluO from the four output bits uθulu2u3. Alternatively, when using the 1/4-coding rate, the symbol interleaver 403 may select the symbol configured of bits uluO and then select another symbol configured of bits u2u3. According to another embodiment, when using the 1/4-coding rate, the symbol interleaver 403 may repeatedly select the symbol configured of bits uluO.
[150] The output of the symbol encoder 402 is inputted to the symbol interleaver 403.
Then, the symbol interleaver 403 performs block interleaving in symbol units on the data outputted from the symbol encoder 402. Any interleaver performing structural rearrangement (or realignment) may be applied as the symbol interleaver 403 of the block processor. However, in the present invention, a variable length symbol interleaver that can be applied even when a plurality of lengths is provided for the symbol, so that its order may be rearranged, may also be used.
[151] FIG. 12 illustrates a symbol interleaver according to an embodiment of the present invention. Herein, the symbol interleaver according to the embodiment of the present invention corresponds to a variable length symbol interleaver that may be applied even when a plurality of lengths is provided for the symbol, so that its order may be rearranged. Particularly, FIG. 12 illustrates an example of the symbol interleaver when K=6 and L=8. Herein, K indicates a number of symbols that are outputted for symbol interleaving from the symbol encoder 402. And, L represents a number of symbols that are actually interleaved by the symbol interleaver 403.
[152] In the present invention, the symbol intereleaver 403 should satisfy the conditions of L - 2°
(wherein n is an integer) and of
L > K
. If there is a difference in value between K and L, (L-K) number of null (or dummy) symbols is added, thereby creating an interleaving pattern. Therefore, K becomes a block size of the actual symbols that are inputted to the symbol interleaver 403 in order to be interleaved. L becomes an interleaving unit when the interleaving process is performed by an interleaving pattern created from the symbol interleaver 403. The example of what is described above is illustrated in FIG. 12.
[153] More specifically, FIG. 12(a) to FIG. 12(c) illustrate a variable length interleaving process of a symbol interleaver shown in FIG. 10. The number of symbols outputted from the symbol encoder 402 in order to be interleaved is equal to 6 (i.e., K=6). In other words, 6 symbols are outputted from the symbol encoder 402 in order to be interleaved. And, the actual interleaving unit (L) is equal to 8 symbols. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12(a), 2 symbols are added to the null (or dummy) symbol, thereby creating the interleaving pattern. Equation 2 shown below described the process of sequentially receiving K number of symbols, the order of which is to be rearranged, and obtaining an L value satisfying the conditions of
L = 2"
(wherein n is an integer) and of
L ≥ K
, thereby creating the interleaving so as to realign (or rearrange) the symbol order. [154] Equation 2 [155] In relation to all places, wherein
0 < i ≤ L-I
11561 PG ) = { S x i x ( i+1) / 2 } mod L
[157] Herein,
L > K L - 2°
, and n and S are integers. Referring to FIG. 12, it is assumed that S is equal to 89, and that L is equal to 8, and FIG. 12 illustrates the created interleaving pattern and an example of the interleaving process. As shown in FIG. 12(b), the order of K number of input symbols and (L-K) number of null symbols is rearranged by using the above- mentioned Equation 2. Then, as shown in FIG. 12(c), the null byte places are removed, so as to rearrange the order, by using Equation 3 shown below. Thereafter, the symbol that is interleaved by the rearranged order is then outputted to the symbol-byte converter.
[158] Equation 3
[159] if P(i) < K-I, then P(i) place is removed and rearranged
[160]
[161] Subsequently, the symbol-byte converter 404 converts to bytes the mobile service data symbols, having the rearranging of the symbol order completed and then outputted in accordance with the rearranged order, and thereafter outputs the converted bytes to the group formatter 304.
[162] FIG. 13 illustrates a block diagram showing the structure of a block processor according to another embodiment of the present invention. Herein, the block processor includes an interleaving unit 610 and a block formatter 620. The interleaving unit 610 may include a byte-symbol converter 611, a symbol-byte converter 612, a symbol in- terleaver 613, and a symbol-byte converter 614. Herein, the symbol interleaver 613 may also be referred to as a block interleaver.
[163] The byte-symbol converter 611 of the interleaving unit 610 converts the mobile service data X outputted in byte units from the RS frame encoder 302 to symbol units. Then, the byte-symbol converter 611 outputs the converted mobile service data symbols to the symbol-byte converter 612 and the symbol interleaver 613. More specifically, the byte-symbol converter 611 converts each 2 bits of the inputted mobile service data byte (=8 bits) to 1 symbol and outputs the converted symbols. This is because the input data of the trellis encoding module 256 consist of symbol units configured of 2 bits. The relationship between the block processor 303 and the trellis encoding module 256 will be described in detail in a later process. At this point, the byte- symbol converter 611 may also receive signaling information including transmission parameters. Furthermore, the signaling information bytes may also be divided into symbol units and then outputted to the symbol-byte converter 612 and the symbol interleaver 613.
[164] The symbol-byte converter 612 groups 4 symbols outputted from the byte-symbol converter 611 so as to configure a byte. Thereafter, the converted data bytes are outputted to the block formatter 620. Herein, each of the symbol-byte converter 612 and the byte-symbol converter 611 respectively performs an inverse process on one another. Therefore, the yield of these two blocks is offset. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 14, the input data X bypass the byte-symbol converter 611 and the symbol-byte converter 612 and are directly inputted to the block formatter 620. More specifically, the interleaving unit 610 of FIG. 14 has a structure equivalent to that of the interleaving unit shown in FIG. 13. Therefore, the same reference numerals will be used in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14.
[165] The symbol interleaver 613 performs block interleaving in symbol units on the data that are outputted from the byte-symbol converter 611. Subsequently, the symbol interleaver 613 outputs the interleaved data to the symbol-byte converter 614. Herein, any type of interleaver that can rearrange the structural order may be used as the symbol interleaver 613 of the present invention. In the example given in the present invention, a variable length interleaver that may be applied for symbols having a wide range of lengths, the order of which is to be rearranged. For example, the symbol interleaver of FIG. 12 may also be used in the block processor shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14.
[166] The symbol-byte converter 614 outputs the symbols having the rearranging of the symbol order completed, in accordance with the rearranged order. Thereafter, the symbols are grouped to be configured in byte units, which are then outputted to the block formatter 620. More specifically, the symbol-byte converter 614 groups 4 symbols outputted from the symbol interleaver 613 so as to configure a data byte. As shown in FIG. 15, the block formatter 620 performs the process of aligning the output of each symbol-byte converter 612 and 614 within the block in accordance with a set standard. Herein, the block formatter 620 operates in association with the trellis encoding module 256.
[167] More specifically, the block formatter 620 decides the output order of the mobile service data outputted from each symbol-byte converter 612 and 614 while taking into consideration the place (or order) of the data excluding the mobile service data that are being inputted, wherein the mobile service data include main service data, known data, RS parity data, and MPEG header data.
[168] According to the embodiment of the present invention, the trellis encoding module 256 is provided with 12 trellis encoders. FIG. 16 illustrates a block diagram showing the trellis encoding module 256 according to the present invention. In the example shown in FIG. 16, 12 identical trellis encoders are combined to the interleaver in order to disperse noise. Herein, each trellis encoder may be provided with a pre-coder.
[169] FIG. 17 illustrates the block processor 303 being concatenated with the trellis encoding module 256. In the transmitting system, a plurality of blocks actually exists between the pre-processor 230 including the block processor 303 and the trellis encoding module 256, as shown in FIG. 3. Conversely, the receiving system considers the pre-processor 230 to be concatenated with the trellis encoding module 256, thereby performing the decoding process accordingly. However, the data excluding the mobile service data that are being inputted to the trellis encoding module 256, wherein the mobile service data include main service data, known data, RS parity data, and MPEG header data, correspond to data that are added to the blocks existing between the block processor 303 and the trellis encoding module 256. FIG. 18 illustrates an example of a data processor 650 being positioned between the block processor 303 and the trellis encoding module 256, while taking the above-described instance into consideration.
[170] Herein, when the interleaving unit 610 of the block processor 303 performs a 1/2-rate encoding process, the interleaving unit 610 may be configured as shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 14). Referring to FIG. 3, for example, the data processor 650 may include a group formatter 304, a data deinterleaver 305, a packet formatter 306, a packet multiplexer 240, and a post-processor 250, wherein the post-processor 250 includes a data randomizer 251, a RS encoder/non-systematic RS encoder 252, a data interleaver 253, a parity replacer 254, and a non-systematic RS encoder 255.
[171] At this point, the trellis encoding module 256 symbolizes the data that are being inputted so as to divide the symbolized data and to send the divided data to each trellis encoder in accordance with a pre-defined method. Herein, one byte is converted into 4 symbols, each being configured of 2 bits. Also, the symbols created from the single data byte are all transmitted to the same trellis encoder. Accordingly, each trellis encoder pre-codes an upper bit of the input symbol, which is then outputted as the uppermost output bit C2. Alternatively, each trellis encoder trellis -encodes a lower bit of the input symbol, which is then outputted as two output bits Cl and CO. The block formatter 620 is controlled so that the data byte outputted from each symbol-byte converter can be transmitted to different trellis encoders.
[172] Hereinafter, the operation of the block formatter 620 will now be described in detail with reference to FIG. 10 to FIG. 12. Referring to FIG. 13, for example, the data byte outputted from the symbol-byte converter 612 and the data byte outputted from the symbol-byte converter 614 are inputted to different trellis encoders of the trellis encoding module 256 in accordance with the control of the block formatter 620. Hereinafter, the data byte outputted from the symbol-byte converter 612 will be referred to as X, and the data byte outputted from the symbol-byte converter 614 will be referred to as Y, for simplicity. Referring to FIG. 15(a), each number (i.e., 0 to 11) indicates the first to twelfth trellis encoders of the trellis encoding module 256, respectively. [173] In addition, the output order of both symbol-byte converters are arranged (or aligned) so that the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 612 are respectively inputted to the 0th to 5th trellis encoders (0 to 5) of the trellis encoding module 256, and that the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 614 are respectively inputted to the 6th to 11th trellis encoders (6 to 11) of the trellis encoding module 256. Herein, the trellis encoders having the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 612 allocated therein, and the trellis encoders having the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 614 allocated therein are merely examples given to simplify the understanding of the present invention. Furthermore, according to an embodiment of the present invention, and assuming that the input data of the block processor 303 correspond to a block configured of 12 bytes, the symbol-byte converter 612 outputs 12 data bytes from XO to Xl 1, and the symbol-byte converter 614 outputs 12 data bytes from YO to Yl 1.
[174] FIG. 15(b) illustrates an example of data being inputted to the trellis encoding module 256. Particularly, FIG. 15(b) illustrates an example of not only the mobile service data but also the main service data and RS parity data being inputted to the trellis encoding module 256, so as to be distributed to each trellis encoder. More specifically, the mobile service data outputted from the block processor 303 pass through the group formatter 304, from which the mobile service data are mixed with the main service data and RS parity data and then outputted, as shown in FIG. 15 (a). Accordingly, each data byte is respectively inputted to the 12 trellis encoders in accordance with the positions (or places) within the data group after being data-interleaved.
[175] Herein, when the output data bytes X and Y of the symbol-byte converters 612 and 614 are allocated to each respective trellis encoder, the input of each trellis encoder may be configured as shown in FIG. 15(b). More specifically, referring to FIG. 15(b), the six mobile service data bytes (XO to X5) outputted from the symbol-byte converter 612 are sequentially allocated (or distributed) to the first to sixth trellis encoders (0 to 5) of the trellis encoding module 256. Also, the 2 mobile service data bytes YO and Yl outputted from the symbol-byte converter 614 are sequentially allocated to the 7th and 8th trellis encoders (6 and 7) of the trellis encoding module 256. Thereafter, among the 5 main service data bytes, 4 data bytes are sequentially allocated to the 9th and 12th trellis encoders (8 to 11) of the trellis encoding module 256. Finally, the remaining 1 byte of the main service data byte is allocated once again to the first trellis encoder (0).
[176] It is assumed that the mobile service data, the main service data, and the RS parity data are allocated to each trellis encoder, as shown in FIG. 15(b). It is also assumed that, as described above, the input of the block processor 303 is configured of 12 bytes, and that 12 bytes from XO to Xl 1 are outputted from the symbol-byte converter 612, and that 12 bytes from YO to Yl 1 are outputted from the symbol-byte converter 614. In this case, as shown in FIG. 15(c), the block formatter 620 arranges the data bytes that are to be outputted from the symbol-byte converters 612 and 614 by the order of XO to X5, YO, Yl, X6 to XlO, Y2 to Y7, Xl 1, and Y8 to Yl 1. More specifically, the trellis encoder that is to perform the encoding process is decided based upon the position (or place) within the transmission frame in which each data byte is inserted. At this point, not only the mobile service data but also the main service data, the MPEG header data, and the RS parity data are also inputted to the trellis encoding module 256. Herein, it is assumed that, in order to perform the above-described operation, the block formatter 620 is informed of (or knows) the information on the data group format after the data- interleaving process.
[177] FIG. 19 illustrates a block diagram of the block processor performing an encoding process at a coding rate of 1/N according to an embodiment of the present invention. Herein, the block processor includes (N-I) number of symbol interleavers 741 to 74N- 1, which are configured in a parallel structure. More specifically, the block processor having the coding rate of 1/N consists of a total of N number of branches (or paths) including a branch (or path), which is directly transmitted to the block formatter 730. In addition, the symbol interleaver 741 to 74N- 1 of each branch may each be configured of a different symbol interleaver. Furthermore, (N-I) number of symbol- byte converter 751 to 75N- 1 each corresponding to each (N-I) number of symbol interleavers 741 to 74N- 1 may be included at the end of each symbol interleaver, respectively. Herein, the output data of the (N-I) number of symbol-byte converter 751 to 75N- 1 are also inputted to the block formatter 730.
[178] In the example of the present invention, N is equal to or smaller than 12. If N is equal to 12, the block formatter 730 may align the output data so that the output byte of the 12th symbol-byte converter 75N- 1 is inputted to the 12th trellis encoder. Alternatively, if N is equal to 3, the block formatter 730 may arranged the output order, so that the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 720 are inputted to the 1st to 4th trellis encoders of the trellis encoding module 256, and that the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 751 are inputted to the 5th to 8th trellis encoders, and that the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 752 are inputted to the 9th to 12th trellis encoders. At this point, the order of the data bytes outputted from each symbol-byte converter may vary in accordance with the position within the data group of the data other than the mobile service data, which are mixed with the mobile service data that are outputted from each symbol-byte converter.
[179] FIG. 20 illustrates a detailed block diagram showing the structure of a block processor according to another embodiment of the present invention. Herein, the block formatter is removed from the block processor so that the operation of the block formatter may be performed by a group formatter. More specifically, the block processor of FIG. 20 may include a byte-symbol converter 810, symbol-byte converters 820 and 840, and a symbol interleaver 830. In this case, the output of each symbol-byte converter 820 and 840 is inputted to the group formatter 850.
[180] Also, the block processor may obtain a desired coding rate by adding symbol in- terleavers and symbol-byte converters. If the system designer wishes a coding rate of 1/N, the block processor needs to be provided with a total of N number of branches (or paths) including a branch (or path), which is directly transmitted to the block formatter 850, and (N-I) number of symbol interleavers and symbol-byte converters configured in a parallel structure with (N-I) number of branches. At this point, the group formatter 850 inserts place holders ensuring the positions (or places) for the MPEG header, the non-systematic RS parity, and the main service data. And, at the same time, the group formatter 850 positions the data bytes outputted from each branch of the block processor.
[181] The number of trellis encoders, the number of symbol-byte converters, and the number of symbol interleavers proposed in the present invention are merely exemplary. And, therefore, the corresponding numbers do not limit the spirit or scope of the present invention. It is apparent to those skilled in the art that the type and position of each data byte being allocated to each trellis encoder of the trellis encoding module 256 may vary in accordance with the data group format. Therefore, the present invention should not be understood merely by the examples given in the description set forth herein. The mobile service data that are encoded at a coding rate of 1/N and outputted from the block processor 303 are inputted to the group formatter 304. Herein, in the example of the present invention, the order of the output data outputted from the block formatter of the block processor 303 are aligned and outputted in accordance with the position of the data bytes within the data group.
[182]
[183] signaling information processing
[184] The transmitter 200 according to the present invention may insert transmission parameters by using a plurality of methods and in a plurality of positions (or places), which are then transmitted to the receiving system. For simplicity, the definition of a transmission parameter that is to be transmitted from the transmitter to the receiving system will now be described. The transmission parameter includes data group information, region information within a data group, the number of RS frames configuring a super frame (i.e., a super frame size (SFS)), the number of RS parity data bytes (P) for each column within the RS frame, whether or not a checksum, which is added to determine the presence of an error in a row direction within the RS frame, has been used, the type and size of the checksum if the checksum is used (presently, 2 bytes are added to the CRC), the number of data groups configuring one RS frame since the RS frame is transmitted to one burst section, the number of data groups configuring the one RS frame is identical to the number of data groups within one burst (i.e., burst size (BS)), a turbo code mode, and a RS code mode.
[185] Also, the transmission parameter required for receiving a burst includes a burst period herein, one burst period corresponds to a value obtained by counting the number of fields starting from the beginning of a current burst until the beginning of a next burst, a positioning order of the RS frames that are currently being transmitted within a super frame (i.e., a permuted frame index (PFI)) or a positioning order of groups that are currently being transmitted within a RS frame (burst) (i.e., a group index (GI)), and a burst size. Depending upon the method of managing a burst, the transmission parameter also includes the number of fields remaining until the beginning of the next burst (i.e., time to next burst (TNB)). And, by transmitting such information as the transmission parameter, each data group being transmitted to the receiving system may indicate a relative distance (or number of fields) between a current position and the beginning of a next burst.
[186] The information included in the transmission parameter corresponds to examples given to facilitate the understanding of the present invention. Therefore, the proposed examples do not limit the scope or spirit of the present invention and may be easily varied or modified by anyone skilled in the art. According to the first embodiment of the present invention, the transmission parameter may be inserted by allocating a predetermined region of the mobile service data packet or the data group. In this case, the receiving system performs synchronization and equalization on a received signal, which is then decoded by symbol units. Thereafter, the packet deformatter may separate the mobile service data and the transmission parameter so as to detect the transmission parameter. According to the first embodiment, the transmission parameter may be inserted from the group formatter 304 and then transmitted.
[187] According to the second embodiment of the present invention, the transmission parameter may be multiplexed with another type of data. For example, when known data are multiplexed with the mobile service data, a transmission parameter may be inserted, instead of the known data, in a place (or position) where a known data byte is to be inserted. Alternatively, the transmission parameter may be mixed with the known data and then inserted in the place where the known data byte is to be inserted. According to the second embodiment, the transmission parameter may be inserted from the group formatter 304 or from the packet formatter 306 and then transmitted.
[188] According to a third embodiment of the present invention, the transmission parameter may be inserted by allocating a portion of a reserved region within a field synchronization segment of a transmission frame. In this case, since the receiving system may perform decoding on a receiving signal by symbol units before detecting the transmission parameter, the transmission parameter having information on the processing methods of the block processor 303 and the group formatter 304 may be inserted in a reserved field of a field synchronization signal. More specifically, the receiving system obtains field synchronization by using a field synchronization segment so as to detect the transmission parameter from a pre-decided position. According to the third embodiment, the transmission parameter may be inserted from the synchronization multiplexer 240 and then transmitted.
[189] According to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the transmission parameter may be inserted in a layer (or hierarchical region) higher than a transport stream (TS) packet. In this case, the receiving system should be able to receive a signal and process the received signal to a layer higher than the TS packet in advance. At this point, the transmission parameter may be used to certify the transmission parameter of a currently received signal and to provide the transmission parameter of a signal that is to be received in a later process.
[190] In the present invention, the variety of transmission parameters associated with the transmission signal may be inserted and transmitted by using the above-described methods according to the first to fourth embodiment of the present invention. At this point, the transmission parameter may be inserted and transmitted by using only one of the four embodiments described above, or by using a selection of the above-described embodiments, or by using all of the above-described embodiments. Furthermore, the information included in the transmission parameter may be duplicated and inserted in each embodiment. Alternatively, only the required information may be inserted in the corresponding position of the corresponding embodiment and then transmitted. Furthermore, in order to ensure robustness of the transmission parameter, a block encoding process of a short cycle (or period) may be performed on the transmission parameter and, then, inserted in a corresponding region. The method for performing a short-period block encoding process on the transmission parameter may include, for example, Kerdock encoding, BCH encoding, RS encoding, and repetition encoding of the transmission parameter. Also, a combination of a plurality of block encoding methods may also be performed on the transmission parameter.
[191] The transmission parameters may be grouped to create a block code of a small size, so as to be inserted in a byte place allocated within the data group for signaling and then transmitted. However, in this case, the block code passes through the block decoded from the receiving end so as to obtain a transmission parameter value. Therefore, the transmission parameters of the turbo code mode and the RS code mode, which are required for block decoding, should first be obtained. Accordingly, the transmission parameters associated with a particular mode may be inserted in a specific section of a known data region. And, in this case, a correlation of with a symbol may be used for a faster decoding process. The receiving system refers to the correlation between each sequence and the currently received sequences, thereby determining the encoding mode and the combination mode.
[192] Meanwhile, when the transmission parameter is inserted in the field synchronization segment region or the known data region and then transmitted, and when the transmission parameter has passed through the transmission channel, the reliability of the transmission parameter is deteriorated. Therefore, one of a plurality of pre-defined patterns may also be inserted in accordance with the corresponding transmission parameter. Herein, the receiving system performs a correlation calculation between the received signal and the pre-defined patterns so as to recognize the transmission parameter. For example, it is assumed that a burst including 5 data groups is pre- decided as pattern A based upon an agreement between the transmitting system and the receiving system. In this case, the transmitting system inserts and transmits pattern A, when the number of groups within the burst is equal to 5. Thereafter, the receiving system calculates a correlation between the received data and a plurality of reference patterns including pattern A, which was created in advance. At this point, if the correlation value between the received data and pattern A is the greatest, the received data indicates the corresponding parameter, and most particularly, the number of groups within the burst. At this point, the number of groups may be acknowledged as 5. Hereinafter, the process of inserting and transmitting the transmission parameter will now be described according to first, second, and third embodiments of the present invention.
[193]
[194] First embodiment
[195] FIG. 21 illustrates a schematic diagram of the group formatter 304 receiving the transmission parameter and inserting the received transmission parameter in region A of the data group according to the present invention. Herein, the group formatter 304 receives mobile service data from the block processor 303. Conversely, the transmission parameter is processed with at least one of a data randomizing process, a RS frame encoding process, and a block processing process, and may then be inputted to the group formatter 304. Alternatively, the transmission parameter may be directly inputted to the group formatter 304 without being processed with any of the above- mentioned processes. In addition, the transmission parameter may be provided from the service multiplexer 100. Alternatively, the transmission parameter may also be generated and provided from within the transmitter 200. The transmission parameter may also include information required by the receiving system in order to receive and process the data included in the data group. For example, the transmission parameter may include data group information, and multiplexing information.
[196] The group formatter 304 inserts the mobile service data and transmission parameter which are to be inputted to corresponding regions within the data group in accordance with a rule for configuring a data group. For example, the transmission parameter passes through a block encoding process of a short period and is, then, inserted in region A of the data group. Particularly, the transmission parameter may be inserted in a pre-arranged and arbitrary position (or place) within region A. If it is assumed that the transmission parameter has been block encoded by the block processor 303, the block processor 303 performs the same data processing operation as the mobile service data, more specifically, either a 1/2-rate encoding or 1/4-rate encoding process on the signaling information including the transmission parameter. Thereafter, the block processor 303 outputs the processed transmission parameter to the group formatter 304. Thereafter, the signaling information is also recognized as the mobile service data and processed accordingly.
[197] FIG. 22 illustrates a block diagram showing an example of the block processor receiving the transmission parameter and processing the received transmission parameter with the same process as the mobile service data. Particularly, FIG. 22 illustrates an example showing the structure of FIG. 10 further including a signaling information provider 411 and multiplexer 412. More specifically, the signaling information provider 411 outputs the signaling information including the transmission parameter to the multiplexer 412. The multiplexer 412 multiplexes the signaling information and the output of the RS frame encoder 302. Then, the multiplexer 412 outputs the multiplexed data to the byte-bit converter 401.
[198] The byte-bit converter 401 divides the mobile service data bytes or signaling information byte outputted from the multiplexer 412 into bits, which are then outputted to the symbol encoder 402. The subsequent operations are identical to those described in FIG. 10. Therefore, a detailed description of the same will be omitted for simplicity. If any of the detailed structures of the block processor 303 shown in FIG. 12, FIG. 15, FIG. 19, and FIG. 20, the signaling information provider 411 and the multiplexer 412 may be provided behind the byte-symbol converter.
[199]
[200] Second embodiment
[201] Meanwhile, when known data generated from the group formatter in accordance with a pre-decided rule are inserted in a corresponding region within the data group, a transmission parameter may be inserted in at least a portion of a region, where known data may be inserted, instead of the known data. For example, when a long known data sequence is inserted at the beginning of region A within the data group, a transmission parameter may be inserted in at least a portion of the beginning of region A instead of the known data. A portion of the known data sequence that is inserted in the remaining portion of region A, excluding the portion in which the transmission parameter is inserted, may be used to detect a starting point of the data group by the receiving system. Alternatively, another portion of region A may be used for channel equalization by the receiving system.
[202] In addition, when the transmission parameter is inserted in the known data region instead of the actual known data. The transmission parameter may be block encoded in short periods and then inserted. Also, as described above, the transmission parameter may also be inserted based upon a pre-defined pattern in accordance with the transmission parameter. If the group formatter 304 inserts known data place holders in a region within the data group, wherein known data may be inserted, instead of the actual known data, the transmission parameter may be inserted by the packet formatter 306. More specifically, when the group formatter 304 inserts the known data place holders, the packet formatter 306 may insert the known data instead of the known data place holders. Alternatively, when the group formatter 304 inserts the known data, the known data may be directly outputted without modification.
[203] FIG. 23 illustrates a block diagram showing the structure of a packet formatter 306 being expanded so that the packet formatter 306 can insert the transmission parameter according to an embodiment of the present invention. More specifically, the structure of the packet formatter 306 further includes a known data generator 351 and a signaling multiplexer 352. Herein, the transmission parameter that is inputted to the signaling multiplexer 352 may include information on the length of a current burst, information indicating a starting point of a next burst, positions in which the groups within the burst exist and the lengths of the groups, information on the time from the current group and the next group within the burst, and information on known data.
[204] The signaling multiplexer 352 selects one of the transmission parameter and the known data generated from the known data generator 351 and, then, outputs the selected data to the packet formatter 306. The packet formatter 306 inserts the known data or transmission parameter outputted from the signaling multiplexer 352 into the known data place holders outputted from the data interleaver 305. Then, the packet formatter 306 outputs the processed data. More specifically, the packet formatter 306 inserts a transmission parameter in at least a portion of the known data region instead of the known data, which is then outputted. For example, when a known data place holder is inserted at a beginning portion of region A within the data group, a transmission parameter may be inserted in a portion of the known data place holder instead of the actual known data.
[205] Also, when the transmission parameter is inserted in the known data place holder instead of the known data, the transmission parameter may be block encoded in short periods and inserted. Alternatively, a pre-defined pattern may be inserted in accordance with the transmission parameter. More specifically, the signaling multiplexer 352 multiplexes the known data and the transmission parameter (or the pattern defined by the transmission parameter) so as to configure a new known data sequence. Then, the signaling multiplexer 352 outputs the newly configured known data sequence to the packet formatter 306. The packet formatter 306 deletes the main service data place holder and RS parity place holder from the output of the data interleaver 305, and creates a mobile service data packet of 188 bytes by using the mobile service data, MPEG header, and the output of the signaling multiplexer. Then, the packet formatter 306 outputs the newly created mobile service data packet to the packet multiplexer 240.
[206] In this case, the region A of each data group has a different known data pattern.
Therefore, the receiving system separates only the symbol in a pre-arranged section of the known data sequence and recognizes the separated symbol as the transmission parameter. Herein, depending upon the design of the transmitting system, the known data may be inserted in different blocks, such as the packet formatter 306, the group formatter 304, or the block processor 303. Therefore, a transmission parameter may be inserted instead of the known data in the block wherein the known data are to be inserted.
[207] According to the second embodiment of the present invention, a transmission parameter including information on the processing method of the block processor 303 may be inserted in a portion of the known data region and then transmitted. In this case, a symbol processing method and position of the symbol for the actual transmission parameter symbol are already decided. Also, the position of the transmission parameter symbol should be positioned so as to be transmitted or received earlier than any other data symbols that are to be decoded. Accordingly, the receiving system may detect the transmission symbol before the data symbol decoding process, so as to use the detected transmission symbol for the decoding process.
[208]
[209] Third embodiment
[210] Meanwhile, the transmission parameter may also be inserted in the field synchronization segment region and then transmitted. FIG. 24 illustrates a block diagram showing the synchronization multiplexer being expanded in order to allow the transmission parameter to be inserted in the field synchronization segment region. Herein, a signaling multiplexer 261 is further included in the synchronization multiplexer 260. The transmission parameter of the general VSB method is configured of 2 fields. More specifically, each field is configured of one field synchronization segment and 312 data segments. Herein, the first 4 symbols of a data segment correspond to the segment synchronization portion, and the first data segment of each field corresponds to the field synchronization portion.
[211] One field synchronization signal is configured to have the length of one data segment. The data segment synchronization pattern exists in the first 4 symbols, which are then followed by pseudo random sequences PN 511, PN 63, PN 63, and PN 63. The next 24 symbols include information associated with the VSB mode. Additionally, the 24 symbols that include information associated with the VSB mode are followed by the remaining 104 symbols, which are reserved symbols. Herein, the last 12 symbols of a previous segment are copied and positioned as the last 12 symbols in the reserved region. In other words, only the 92 symbols in the field synchronization segment are the symbols that correspond to the actual reserved region.
[212] Therefore, the signaling multiplexer 261 multiplexes the transmission parameter with an already-existing field synchronization segment symbol, so that the transmission parameter can be inserted in the reserved region of the field synchronization segment. Then, the signaling multiplexer 261 outputs the multiplexed transmission parameter to the synchronization multiplexer 260. The synchronization multiplexer 260 multiplexes the segment synchronization symbol, the data symbols, and the new field synchronization segment outputted from the signaling multiplexer 261, thereby configuring a new transmission frame. The transmission frame including the field synchronization segment, wherein the transmission parameter is inserted, is outputted to the transmission unit 270. At this point, the reserved region within the field synchronization segment for inserting the transmission parameter may correspond to a portion of or the entire 92 symbols of the reserved region. Herein, the transmission parameter being inserted in the reserved region may, for example, include information identifying the transmission parameter as the main service data, the mobile service data, or a different type of mobile service data.
[213] If the information on the processing method of the block processor 303 is transmitted as a portion of the transmission parameter, and when the receiving system wishes to perform a decoding process corresponding to the block processor 303, the receiving system should be informed of such information on the block processing method in order to perform the decoding process. Therefore, the information on the processing method of the block processor 303 should already be known prior to the block decoding process. Accordingly, as described in the third embodiment of the present invention, when the transmission parameter having the information on the processing method of the block processor 303 (and/or the group formatter 304) is inserted in the reserved region of the field synchronization signal and then transmitted, the receiving system is capable of detecting the transmission parameter prior to performing the block decoding process on the received signal. [214]
[215] Receiving system
[216] FIG. 25 illustrates a block diagram showing a structure of a digital broadcast receiving system according to the present invention. The digital broadcast receiving system of FIG. 25 uses known data information, which is inserted in the mobile service data section and, then, transmitted by the transmitting system, so as to perform carrier synchronization recovery, frame synchronization recovery, and channel equalization, thereby enhancing the receiving performance. Referring to FIG. 25, the digital broadcast receiving system includes a tuner 901, a demodulator 902, an equalizer 903, a known data detector 904, a block decoder 905, a data deformatter 906, a RS frame decoder 907, a derandomizer 908, a data deinterleaver 909, a RS decoder 910, and a data derandomizer 911. Herein, for simplicity of the description of the present invention, the data deformatter 906, the RS frame decoder 907, and the derandomizer 908 will be collectively referred to as a mobile service data processing unit. And, the data deinterleaver 909, the RS decoder 910, and the data derandomizer 911 will be collectively referred to as a main service data processing unit.
[217] More specifically, the tuner 901 tunes a frequency of a particular channel and down- converts the tuned frequency to an intermediate frequency (IF) signal. Then, the tuner 901 outputs the down-converted IF signal to the demodulator 902 and the known data detector 904. The demodulator 902 performs self gain control, carrier recovery, and timing recovery processes on the inputted IF signal, thereby modifying the IF signal to a baseband signal. Then, the demodulator 902 outputs the newly created baseband signal to the equalizer 903 and the known data detector 904. The equalizer 903 compensates the distortion of the channel included in the demodulated signal and then outputs the error-compensated signal to the block decoder 905.
[218] At this point, the known data detector 904 detects the known sequence place inserted by the transmitting end from the input/output data of the demodulator 902 (i.e., the data prior to the demodulation process or the data after the demodulation process). Thereafter, the place information along with the symbol sequence of the known data, which are generated from the detected place, is outputted to the demodulator 902 and the equalizer 903. Also, the known data detector 904 outputs a set of information to the block decoder 905. This set of information is used to allow the block decoder 905 of the receiving system to identify the mobile service data that are processed with additional encoding from the transmitting system and the main service data that are not processed with additional encoding. In addition, although the connection status is not shown in FIG. 25, the information detected from the known data detector 904 may be used throughout the entire receiving system and may also be used in the data de- formatter 906 and the RS frame decoder 907. The demodulator 902 uses the known data symbol sequence during the timing and/or carrier recovery, thereby enhancing the demodulating performance. Similarly, the equalizer 903 uses the known data so as to enhance the equalizing performance. Moreover, the decoding result of the block decoder 905 may be fed-back to the equalizer 903, thereby enhancing the equalizing performance.
[219] The equalizer 903 may perform channel equalization by using a plurality of methods. An example of estimating a channel impulse response (CIR) so as to perform channel equalization will be given in the description of the present invention. Most particularly, an example of estimating the CIR in accordance with each region within the data group, which is hierarchically divided and transmitted from the transmitting system, and applying each CIR differently will also be described herein. Furthermore, by using the known data, the place and contents of which is known in accordance with an agreement between the transmitting system and the receiving system, and the field synchronization data, so as to estimate the CIR, the present invention may be able to perform channel equalization with more stability.
[220] Herein, the data group that is inputted for the equalization process is divided into regions A to C, as shown in FIG. 6. More specifically, in the example of the present invention, each region A, B, and C are further divided into regions Al to A5, regions Bl and B2, and regions Cl to C3, respectively. Referring to FIG. 6, the CIR that is estimated from the field synchronization data in the data structure is referred to as CIR_FS. Alternatively, the CIRs that are estimated from each of the 5 known data sequences existing in region A are sequentially referred to as CIR_N0, CIR_N1, CIR_N2, CIR_N3, and CIR_N4.
[221] As described above, the present invention uses the CIR estimated from the field synchronization data and the known data sequences in order to perform channel equalization on data within the data group. At this point, each of the estimated CIRs may be directly used in accordance with the characteristics of each region within the data group. Alternatively, a plurality of the estimated CIRs may also be either interpolated or extrapolated so as to create a new CIR, which is then used for the channel equalization process.
[222] Herein, when a value F(A) of a function F(x) at a particular point A and a value F(B) of the function F(x) at another particular point B are known, interpolation refers to estimating a function value of a point within the section between points A and B. Linear interpolation corresponds to the simplest form among a wide range of interpolation operations. The linear interpolation described herein is merely exemplary among a wide range of possible interpolation methods. And, therefore, the present invention is not limited only to the examples set forth herein.
[223] Alternatively, when a value F(A) of a function F(x) at a particular point A and a value F(B) of the function F(x) at another particular point B are known, extrapolation refers to estimating a function value of a point outside of the section between points A and B. Linear extrapolation is the simplest form among a wide range of extrapolation operations. Similarly, the linear extrapolation described herein is merely exemplary among a wide range of possible extrapolation methods. And, therefore, the present invention is not limited only to the examples set forth herein.
[224] More specifically, in case of region Cl, any one of the CIR_N4 estimated from a previous data group, the CIR_FS estimated from the current data group that is to be processed with channel equalization, and a new CIR generated by extrapolating the CIR_FS of the current data group and the CIR_N0 may be used to perform channel equalization. Alternatively, in case of region Bl, a variety of methods may be applied as described in the case for region Cl. For example, a new CIR created by linearly extrapolating the CIR_FS estimated from the current data group and the CIR_N0 may be used to perform channel equalization. Also, the CIR_FS estimated from the current data group may also be used to perform channel equalization. Finally, in case of region Al, a new CIR may be created by interpolating the CIR_FS estimated from the current data group and CIR_N0, which is then used to perform channel equalization. Furthermore, any one of the CIR_FS estimated from the current data group and CIR_N0 may be used to perform channel equalization.
[225] In case of regions A2 to A5, CIR_N(i-l) estimated from the current data group and CIR_N(i) may be interpolated to create a new CIR and use the newly created CIR to perform channel equalization. Also, any one of the CIR_N(i-l) estimated from the current data group and the CIR_N(i) may be used to perform channel equalization. Alternatively, in case of regions B2, C2, and C3, CIR_N3 and CIR_N4 both estimated from the current data group may be extrapolated to create a new CIR, which is then used to perform the channel equalization process. Furthermore, the CIR_N4 estimated from the current data group may be used to perform the channel equalization process. Accordingly, an optimum performance may be obtained when performing channel equalization on the data inserted in the data group. The methods of obtaining the CIRs required for performing the channel equalization process in each region within the data group, as described above, are merely examples given to facilitate the understanding of the present invention. A wider range of methods may also be used herein. And, therefore, the present invention will not only be limited to the examples given in the description set forth herein.
[226] Meanwhile, if the data being inputted to the block decoder 905 after being channel equalized from the equalizer 903 correspond to the mobile service data having additional encoding and trellis encoding performed thereon by the transmitting system, trellis decoding and additional decoding processes are performed on the inputted data as inverse processes of the transmitting system. Alternatively, if the data being inputted to the block decoder 905 correspond to the main service data having only trellis encoding performed thereon, and not the additional encoding, only the trellis decoding process is performed on the inputted data as the inverse process of the transmitting system.
[227] The data group decoded by the block decoder 905 is inputted to the data deformatter 906, and the main service data are inputted to the data deinterleaver 909. According to another embodiment, the main data may also bypass the block decoder 905 so as to be directly inputted to the data deinterleaver 909. In this case, a trellis decoder for the main service data should be provided before the data deinterleaver 909. When the block decoder 905 outputs the data group to the data deformatter 906, the known data, trellis initialization data, and MPEG header, which are inserted in the data group, and the RS parity, which is added by the RS encoder/non-systematic RS encoder or non- systematic RS encoder of the transmitting system, are removed. Then, the processed data are outputted to the data deformatter 906. Herein, the removal of the data may be performed before the block decoding process, or may be performed during or after the block decoding process. If the transmitting system includes signaling information in the data group upon transmission, the signaling information is outputted to the data de- formatter 906.
[228] More specifically, if the inputted data correspond to the main service data, the block decoder 905 performs Viterbi decoding on the inputted data so as to output a hard decision value or to perform a hard-decision on a soft decision value, thereby outputting the result. Meanwhile, if the inputted data correspond to the mobile service data, the block decoder 905 outputs a hard decision value or a soft decision value with respect to the inputted mobile service data. In other words, if the inputted data correspond to the mobile service data, the block decoder 905 performs a decoding process on the data encoded by the block processor and trellis encoding module of the transmitting system.
[229] At this point, the RS frame encoder of the pre-processor included in the transmitting system may be viewed as an external code. And, the block processor and the trellis encoder may be viewed as an internal code. In order to maximize the performance of the external code when decoding such concatenated codes, the decoder of the internal code should output a soft decision value. Therefore, the block decoder 905 may output a hard decision value on the mobile service data. However, when required, it may be more preferable for the block decoder 905 to output a soft decision value.
[230] Meanwhile, the data deinterleaver 909, the RS decoder 910, and the derandomizer 911 are blocks required for receiving the main service data. Therefore, the above- mentioned blocks may not be required in the structure of a digital broadcast receiving system that only receives the mobile service data. The data deinterleaver 909 performs an inverse process of the data interleaver included in the transmitting system. In other words, the data deinterleaver 909 deinterleaves the main service data outputted from the block decoder 905 and outputs the deinterleaved main service data to the RS decoder 910. The RS decoder 910 performs a systematic RS decoding process on the deinterleaved data and outputs the processed data to the derandomizer 911. The de- randomizer 911 receives the output of the RS decoder 910 and generates a pseudo random data byte identical to that of the randomizer included in the digital broadcast transmitting system. Thereafter, the derandomizer 911 performs a bitwise exclusive OR (XOR) operation on the generated pseudo random data byte, thereby inserting the MPEG synchronization bytes to the beginning of each packet so as to output the data in 188-byte main service data packet units.
[231] Meanwhile, the data being outputted from the block decoder 905 to the data de- formatter 906 are inputted in the form of a data group. At this point, the data de- formatter 906 already knows the structure of the data that are to be inputted and is, therefore, capable of identifying the signaling information, which includes the system information, and the mobile service data from the data group. Thereafter, the data de- formatter 906 outputs the identified signaling information to a block for processing signaling information (not shown) and outputs the identified mobile service data to the RS frame decoder 907. More specifically, the RS frame decoder 907 receives only the RS encoded and CRC encoded mobile service data that are transmitted from the data deformatter 906.
[232] The RS frame encoder 907 performs an inverse process of the RS frame encoder included in the transmitting system so as to correct the error within the RS frame. Then, the RS frame decoder 907 adds the 1-byte MPEG synchronization service data packet, which had been removed during the RS frame encoding process, to the error- corrected mobile service data packet. Thereafter, the processed data packet is outputted to the derandomizer 908. The operation of the RS frame decoder 907 will be described in detail in a later process. The derandomizer 908 performs a derandomizing process, which corresponds to the inverse process of the randomizer included in the transmitting system, on the received mobile service data. Thereafter, the derandomized data are outputted, thereby obtaining the mobile service data transmitted from the transmitting system. Hereinafter, detailed operations of the RS frame decoder 907 will now be described.
[233] FIG. 26 illustrates a series of exemplary step of an error correction decoding process of the RS frame decoder 907 according to the present invention. More specifically, the RS frame decoder 907 groups mobile service data bytes received from the data de- formatter 906 so as to configure an RS frame. The mobile service data correspond to data RS encoded and CRC encoded from the transmitting system. FIG. 26(a) illustrates an example of configuring the RS frame. More specifically, the transmitting system divided the RS frame having the size of (N+2)*235 to 30*235 byte blocks. When it is assumed that each of the divided mobile service data byte blocks is inserted in each data group and then transmitted, the receiving system also groups the 30*235 mobile service data byte blocks respectively inserted in each data group, thereby configuring an RS frame having the size of (N+2)*235. For example, when it is assumed that an RS frame is divided into 18 30*235 byte blocks and transmitted from a burst section, the receiving system also groups the mobile service data bytes of 18 data groups within the corresponding burst section, so as to configure the RS frame. Furthermore, when it is assumed that N is equal to 538 (i.e., N=538), the RS frame decoder 907 may group the mobile service data bytes within the 18 data groups included in a burst so as to configure a RS frame having the size of 540*235 bytes.
[234] Herein, when it is assumed that the block decoder 905 outputs a soft decision value for the decoding result, the RS frame decoder 907 may decide the '0' and T of the corresponding bit by using the codes of the soft decision value. 8 bits that are each decided as described above are grouped to create 1 data byte. If the above-described process is performed on all soft decision values of the 18 data groups included in a single burst, the RS frame having the size of 540*235 bytes may be configured. Additionally, the present invention uses the soft decision value not only to configure the RS frame but also to configure a reliability map. Herein, the reliability map indicates the reliability of the corresponding data byte, which is configured by grouping 8 bits, the 8 bits being decided by the codes of the soft decision value.
[235] For example, when the absolute value of the soft decision value exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the value of the corresponding bit, which is decided by the code of the corresponding soft decision value, is determined to be reliable. Conversely, when the absolute value of the soft decision value does not exceed the pre-determined threshold value, the value of the corresponding bit is determined to be unreliable. Thereafter, if even a single bit among the 8 bits, which are decided by the codes of the soft decision value and group to configure 1 data byte, is determined to be unreliable, the corresponding data byte is marked on the reliability map as an unreliable data byte.
[236] Herein, determining the reliability of 1 data byte is only exemplary. More specifically, when a plurality of data bytes (e.g., at least 4 data bytes) are determined to be unreliable, the corresponding data bytes may also be marked as unreliable data bytes within the reliability map. Conversely, when all of the data bits within the 1 data byte are determined to be reliable (i.e., when the absolute value of the soft decision values of all 8 bits included in the 1 data byte exceed the predetermined threshold value), the corresponding data byte is marked to be a reliable data byte on the reliability map. Similarly, when a plurality of data bytes (e.g., at least 4 data bytes) are determined to be reliable, the corresponding data bytes may also be marked as reliable data bytes within the reliability map. The numbers proposed in the above-described example are merely exemplary and, therefore, do not limit the scope or spirit of the present invention.
[237] The process of configuring the RS frame and the process of configuring the reliability map both using the soft decision value may be performed at the same time. Herein, the reliability information within the reliability map is in a one-to-one correspondence with each byte within the RS frame. For example, if a RS frame has the size of 540*235 bytes, the reliability map is also configured to have the size of 540*235 bytes. FIG. 26(a') illustrates the process steps of configuring the reliability map according to the present invention. Meanwhile, if a RS frame is configured to have the size of (N+2)*235 bytes, the RS frame decoder 907 performs a CRC syndrome checking process on the corresponding RS frame, thereby verifying whether any error has occurred in each row. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 26(b), a 2-byte checksum is removed to configure an RS frame having the size of N*235 bytes. Herein, the presence (or existence) of an error is indicated on an error flag corresponding to each row. Similarly, since the portion of the reliability map corresponding to the CRC checksum has hardly any applicability, this portion is removed so that only N*235 number of the reliability information bytes remain, as shown in FIG. 26(b').
[238] After performing the CRC syndrome checking process, the RS frame decoder 907 performs RS decoding in a column direction. Herein, a RS erasure correction process may be performed in accordance with the number of CRC error flags. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 26(c), the CRC error flag corresponding to each row within the RS frame is verified. Thereafter, the RS frame decoder 907 determines whether the number of rows having a CRC error occurring therein is equal to or smaller than the maximum number of errors on which the RS erasure correction may be performed, when performing the RS decoding process in a column direction. The maximum number of errors corresponds to a number of parity bytes inserted when performing the RS encoding process. In the embodiment of the present invention, it is assumed that 48 parity bytes have been added to each column.
[239] If the number of rows having the CRC errors occurring therein is smaller than or equal to the maximum number of errors (i.e., 48 errors according to this embodiment) that can be corrected by the RS erasure decoding process, a (235,187)-RS erasure decoding process is performed in a column direction on the RS frame having 235 N- byte rows, as shown in FIG. 26(d). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26(f), the 48-byte parity data that have been added at the end of each column are removed. Conversely, however, if the number of rows having the CRC errors occurring therein is greater than the maximum number of errors (i.e., 48 errors) that can be corrected by the RS erasure decoding process, the RS erasure decoding process cannot be performed. In this case, the error may be corrected by performing a general RS decoding process. In addition, the reliability map, which has been created based upon the soft decision value along with the RS frame, may be used to further enhance the error correction ability (or performance) of the present invention.
[240] More specifically, the RS frame decoder 907 compares the absolute value of the soft decision value of the block decoder 905 with the pre-determined threshold value, so as to determine the reliability of the bit value decided by the code of the corresponding soft decision value. Also, 8 bits, each being determined by the code of the soft decision value, are grouped to form 1 data byte. Accordingly, the reliability information on this 1 data byte is indicated on the reliability map. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26(e), even though a particular row is determined to have an error occurring therein based upon a CRC syndrome checking process on the particular row, the present invention does not assume that all bytes included in the row have errors occurring therein. The present invention refers to the reliability information of the reliability map and sets only the bytes that have been determined to be unreliable as erroneous bytes. In other words, with disregard to whether or not a CRC error exists within the corresponding row, only the bytes that are determined to be unreliable based upon the reliability map are set as erasure points.
[241] According to another method, when it is determined that CRC errors are included in the corresponding row, based upon the result of the CRC syndrome checking result, only the bytes that are determined by the reliability map to be unreliable are set as errors. More specifically, only the bytes corresponding to the row that is determined to have errors included therein and being determined to be unreliable based upon the reliability information, are set as the erasure points. Thereafter, if the number of error points for each column is smaller than or equal to the maximum number of errors (i.e., 48 errors) that can be corrected by the RS erasure decoding process, an RS erasure decoding process is performed on the corresponding column. Conversely, if the number of error points for each column is greater than the maximum number of errors (i.e., 48 errors) that can be corrected by the RS erasure decoding process, a general decoding process is performed on the corresponding column.
[242] More specifically, if the number of rows having CRC errors included therein is greater than the maximum number of errors (i.e., 48 errors) that can be corrected by the RS erasure decoding process, either an RS erasure decoding process or a general RS decoding process is performed on a column that is decided based upon the reliability information of the reliability map, in accordance with the number of erasure points within the corresponding column. For example, it is assumed that the number of rows having CRC errors included therein within the RS frame is greater than 48. And, it is also assumed that the number of erasure points decided based upon the reliability information of the reliability map is indicated as 40 erasure points in the first column and as 50 erasure points in the second column. In this case, a (235,187)-RS erasure decoding process is performed on the first column. Alternatively, a (235,187)-RS decoding process is performed on the second column. When error correction decoding is performed on all column directions within the RS frame by using the above- described process, the 48-byte parity data which were added at the end of each column are removed, as shown in FIG. 26(f).
[243] As described above, even though the total number of CRC errors corresponding to each row within the RS frame is greater than the maximum number of errors that can be corrected by the RS erasure decoding process, when the number of bytes determined to have a low reliability level, based upon the reliability information on the reliability map within a particular column, while performing error correction decoding on the particular column. Herein, the difference between the general RS decoding process and the RS erasure decoding process is the number of errors that can be corrected. More specifically, when performing the general RS decoding process, the number of errors corresponding to half of the number of parity bytes (i.e., (number of parity bytes)/2) that are inserted during the RS encoding process may be error corrected (e.g., 24 errors may be corrected). Alternatively, when performing the RS erasure decoding process, the number of errors corresponding to the number of parity bytes that are inserted during the RS encoding process may be error corrected (e.g., 48 errors may be corrected).
[244] After performing the error correction decoding process, as described above, a RS frame configured of 187 N-byte rows (or packets) maybe obtained, as shown in FIG. 26(f). Furthermore, the RS frame having the size of N* 187 bytes is sequentially outputted in N number of 187-byte units. Herein, as shown in FIG. 26(g), the 1-byte MPEG synchronization byte that was removed by the transmitting system is added at the end of each 187-byte packet, thereby outputting 188-byte mobile service data packets.
[245] FIG. 27 illustrates an example of a data structure of a VSB signal transmitted by a digital broadcast transmitting system in which a known data sequence having a same pattern is periodically inserted into the valid data. In FIG. 27, A represents a number of valid data symbols and B represents a number of known data symbols in each data block. In other words, a known data sequence having B symbols is inserted at a period of (A+B) symbols. The data having A symbols may be mobile service data, main service data or a combination of mobile and main service data. For the purpose of distinguishing these data from the known data sequence, the data having A symbols will be called valid data. A digital broadcast receiving system may detect the location of the known data shown in FIG. 27 and can estimate a coarse frequency offset value during the known data location detection. Thereafter, the receiving system may further estimate a carrier frequency offset value using the known data location information and the coarse frequency offset value.
[246] FIG. 28 illustrates a detailed block diagram of an example of the demodulator 902 shown in FIG. 25. The demodulator 902 includes a phase splitter 1511, a numerically controlled oscillator (NCO) 1512, a first multiplier 1513, a resampler 1514, a second multiplier 1515, a matched filter 1516, a DC remover 1517, a decimator 1518, a timing recovery unit 1520, a carrier recovery unit 1530, and a phase compensation unit 1540. The timing recovery unit 1520 includes a buffer 1521, a decimator 1522, a timing error detector 1523, a loop filter 1524, a holder 1525, and a numerically controlled oscillator (NCO) 1526. The carrier recovery unit 1530 performs carrier recovery on the signals resampled by the resampler 1515 by estimating a frequency offset value of the signals using the known data sequence detected by the known sequence detector 1450. The carrier recovery unit 1530 includes a buffer 1531, a frequency offset estimator 1532, a loop filter 1533, a holder 1534, an adder 1535, and a numerically controlled oscillator (NCO) 1536. The phase compensation unit 1540 includes a buffer 1541, a frequency offset estimator 1542, a holder 1543, a numerically controlled oscillator (NCO) 1544, and a multiplier 1545. The decimators 1518 and 1522 are required when an input signal is oversampled at a sampling rate of N in an analog-to-digital converter (ADC) (not illustrated). Each of the decimators 1518 and 1522 decimates the oversampled signal at a rate of 1/N. For example, if an input signal is oversampled at a rate of 2 such that one symbol includes two samples, the decimators 1518 and 1522 decimate the oversampled input signal at a rate of 1/2. The input signal may bypass the decimators 1518 and 1522 if the input signal is not oversampled.
[247] Referring back to FIG. 28, the phase splitter 1511 splits a digital passband signal outputted from an analog-to-digital converter (ADC) into a complex signal, i.e., I and Q signals. I and Q signals corresponds to real and imaginary components of the digital passband signal, respectively, and phases of I and Q signals are orthogonal to each other. The first multiplier 1513 converts (transits) the passband I and Q signals outputted from the phase splitter 1511 into baseband signals by multiplying the passband I and Q signals with a complex signal which is generated by the NCO 1512 and has a frequency proportional to a predetermined constant value. Then the baseband signals are inputted to the resampler 1514 which resamples the baseband signals according to a timing clock provided by the NCO 1526 of the timing recovery unit 1520. For example, if the ADC uses a fixed 25 MHz oscillator, the baseband signals outputted from the first multiplier 1513 and having a frequency of 25 MHz are in- terpolated in the resampler 1514 and are restored into baseband signals having a frequency of 21.524476 MHz which is two times greater than a symbol clock of the input signal. On the other hand, if the ADC uses a variable frequency of the output signal of the NCO 1526 of the timing recovery unit 1520 as a resampling frequency, the resampler 1514 may not be required.
[248] The second multiplier 1515 multiplies the signals outputted from the resampler 1514 with the output frequency of the NCO 1536 included in the carrier recovery unit 1530 in order to compensate a residual carrier, and it outputs the compensated signals into the matched filter 1516 and the timing recovery unit 1520. The matched filter 1516 filters the compensated signals and the filtered signals are inputted to the DC remover 1517, the known sequence detector 1450, and the carrier recovery unit 1530. The known data detector 1450 detects a location of a known data sequence which is transmitted periodically or non-periodically and estimates an initial frequency offset during the known data detection.
[249] When a VSB data frame is received, the known sequence detector 450 detects a position of the known data included in the VSB data frame, and outputs the detected position information (a known sequence position indicator) to the timing recovery unit 1520, the carrier recovery unit 1530, and the phase compensation unit 1540 included in the demodulator 920 shown in FIG. 28. Furthermore, the known sequence detector 1450 estimates an initial frequency offset and outputs the estimated initial frequency offset to the carrier recovery 1530. The timing recovery unit 1520 receives the signals compensated by the second multiplier 1515 as shown in FIG. 28, or it may receive the signals (not compensated) directly outputted from the resampler 1514. The buffer 1521 included in the timing recovery unit 1520 temporarily stores the received signals, and the decimator 1522 decimates the stored signals at a rate of 1/N if the stored signals are oversampled at a sampling rate of N. The timing error detector 1523 detects a timing error of the decimated signals. More details of the timing error detector 1523 are described below.
[250] FIG. 29 illustrates a first example of the timing recovery unit 1520 included in the demodulator 902 shown in FIG. 28. Referring to FIG. 29, the timing recovery unit 1520 includes a timing error detector 1523, a loop filter 1524, and a NCO 1526. The baseband signal outputted from the resampler 1514 is inputted to the timing error detector 1523. The timing error detector 1523 detects a timing error from the baseband signal using, e.g., a spectrum line method in which a sideband of a spectrum of the baseband signal is used. In addition, a known sequence periodically inserted as shown in FIG. 27 can be used to detect a timing error of the baseband signal. The loop filter 1524 shown in FIG. 29 performs low pass filtering the detected timing error and outputs the filtered timing error to the NCO 1526. The loop filter 1524 may modify a phase error and a frequency error of a timing clock. The NCO 1526 controls sampling timing of the resampler 1514 by accumulating the timing errors outputted from the loop filter 1524 and outputting a phase component of the accumulated timing errors to the resampler 1514. In other words, the timing recovery unit 1526 enables the resampler 1514 to output timing clock recovered data.
[251] FIG. 30 illustrates a second example of the timing recovery unit 1520 included in the demodulator 902 shown in FIG. 28. Referring to FIG. 30, the timing recovery unit 1520 includes a first timing error detector 1523a, a second timing error detector 1523b, a multiplexer 1523c, a loop-filter 1524, and an NCO 1526. The timing recovery unit 1520 would be beneficial when the input signal is divided into a first area in which known data having a predetermined length are inserted at predetermined position(s) and a second area that includes no known data. Assuming that the first timing error detector 1523a detects a first timing error using a sideband of a spectrum of an input signal and the second timing error detector 1523b detects a second timing error using the known data, the multiplexer 1523c can output the first timing error for the first area and can output the second timing error for the second area. The multiplexer 1523c may output both of the first and second timing errors for the first area in which the known data are inserted. By using the known data a more reliable timing error can be detected and the performance of the timing recovery unit 1520 can be enhanced.
[252] This disclosure describes two ways of detecting a timing error. One way is to detect a timing error using correlation in the time domain between known data pre-known to a transmitting system and a receiving system (reference known data) and the known data actually received by the receiving system, and the other way is to detect a timing error using correlation in the frequency domain between two known data actually received by the receiving system. In FIG. 31, a timing error is detected by calculating correlation between the reference known data pre-known to and generated by the receiving system and the known data actually received. In FIG. 31, correlation between an entire portion of the reference know data sequence and an entire portion of the received known data sequence is calculated. The correlation output has a peak value at the end of each known data sequence actually received.
[253] In FIG. 32, a timing error is detected by calculating correlation values between divided portions of the reference known data sequence and divided portions of the received known data sequence, respectively. The correlation output has a peak value at the end of each divided portion of the received known data sequence. The correlation values may be added as a total correlation value as shown FIG. 32, and the total correlation value can be used to calculate the timing error. When an entire portion of the received known data is used for correlation calculation, the timing error can be obtained for each data block. If the correlation level of the entire portion of the known data sequence is low, a more precise correlation can be obtained by using divided portions of the known data sequence as shown in FIG. 32.
[254] The use of a final correlation value which is obtained based upon a plurality of correlation values of divided portions of a received known data sequence may reduce the carrier frequency error. In addition, the process time for the timing recovery can be greatly reduced when the plurality of correlation values are used to calculate the timing error. For example, when the reference known data sequence which is pre-known to the transmitting system and receiving system is divided into K portions, K correlation values between the K portions of the reference known data sequence and the corresponding divided portions of the received known data sequence can be calculated, or any combination(s) of the correlation values can be used. Therefore, the period of the timing error detection can be reduced when the divided portions of the known data sequence are used instead of the entire portion of the sequence.
[255] The timing error can be calculated from the peak value of the correlation values. The timing error is obtained for each data block if an entire portion of the known data sequence is used as shown in FIG. 33. On the other hand, if K divided portions of the known data sequence are used for correlation calculation, K correlation values and corresponding peak values can be obtained. This indicates that the timing error can be detected K times.
[256] A method of detecting a timing error using the correlation between the reference known data and the received known data shown will now be described in more detail. FIG. 33 illustrates correlation values between the reference known data and the received known data. The correlation values correspond to data samples sampled at a rate two times greater than the symbol clock. When the random data effect is minimized and there is no timing clock error, the correlation values between the reference known data and the received known data are symmetrical. However, if a timing phase error exists, the correlation values adjacent to the peak value are not symmetrical as shown in FIG. 33. Therefore, the timing error can be obtained by using a difference (timing phase error shown in FIG. 33) between the correlation values before and after the peak value.
[257] FIG. 34 illustrates an example of the timing error detector 1523 shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29, and FIG. 30. The timing error detector 1523 includes a correlator 1621, a down sampler 1623, an absolute value calculator 1625, a delay 1627, and a subtracter 1629. The correlator 1621 receives a known data sequence sampled at a rate at least two times higher than the symbol clock frequency and calculates the correlation values between the received known data sequence and a reference known data sequence. The down sampler 1623 performs down sampling on the correlation values and obtains samples having a symbol frequency. For example, if the data inputted to the correlator 1621 is pre-sampled at a sampling rate of 2, then the down sampler 1621 performs down sampling at a rate of 1/2 to obtain samples having the symbol frequency. The absolute value calculator 1625 calculates absolute values (or square values) of the down-sampled correlation values. These absolute values are inputted to the delay 1627 and the subtractor 1629. The delay 1627 delays the absolute values for a symbol and the subtractor then outputs a timing error by subtracting the delayed absolute value from the values outputted from the absolute value calculator 1625.
[258] The arrangement of the correlator 1621, the down sampler 1623, the absolute value calculator 1625, and the delay 1627, and the subtractor 1629 shown in FIG. 34 can be modified. For example, the timing phase error can be calculated in the order of the down sampler 1623, the correlator 1621, and the absolute value calculator 1625, or in the order of the correlator 1621, the absolute value calculator 1625, and the down sampler 1623.
[259] The timing error can also be obtained using the frequency characteristic of the known data. When there is a timing frequency error, a phase of the input signal increases at a fixed slope as the frequency of the signal increases and this slope is different for current and next data block. Therefore, the timing error can be calculated based on the frequency characteristic of two different known data blocks. In FIG. 35, a current known data sequence (right) and a previous known data sequence (left) are converted into first and second frequency domain signals, respectively, using a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) algorithm. The conjugate value of the first frequency domain signal is then multiplied with the second frequency domain signal in order to obtain the correlation value between two frequency domain signals. In other words, the correlation between the frequency value of the previous known data sequence and the frequency value of the current known data sequence is used to detect a phase change between the known data blocks for each frequency. In this way the phase distortion of a channel can be eliminated.
[260] The frequency response of a complex VSB signal does not have a full symmetric distribution as shown in FIG. 33. Rather, its distribution is a left or right half of the distribution and the frequency domain correlation values also have a half distribution. In order to the phase difference between the frequency domain correlation values, the frequency domain having the correlation values can be divided into two sub-areas and a phase of a combined correlation value in each sub-area can be obtained. Thereafter, the difference between the phases of sub-areas can be used to calculate a timing frequency error. When a phase of a combined correlation values is used for each frequency, the magnitude of each correlation value is proportional to reliability and a phase component of each correlation value is reflected to the final phase component in proportion to the magnitude. [261] FIG. 36 illustrates another example of the timing error detector 1523 shown in FIG. 28, FIG. 29, and FIG. 30. The timing error detector 1523 shown in FIG. 36 includes a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) unit 1601, a first delay 1603, a conjugator 1605, a multiplier 1607, an accumulator (adder) 1609, a phase detector 1611, a second delay 1613, and a sub tractor 1615. The first delay 1603 delays for one data block and the second delay 1613 delays for 1/4 data block. One data block includes a frequency response of a sequence of N known data symbol sequences. When a known data region is known and the data symbols are received, the FFT unit 1601 converts complex values of consecutive N known data symbol sequences into complex values in the frequency domain. The first delay 1603 delays the frequency domain complex values for a time corresponding to one data block, and the conjugator 1605 generate conjugate values of the delayed complex values. The multiplier 1607 multiplies the current block of known data outputted from the FFT unit 1601 with the previous block of known data outputted from the conjugator 1605. The output of the multiplier 1607 represents frequency region correlation values within a known data block.
[262] Since the complex VSB data exist only on a half of the frequency domain, the accumulator 1609 divides a data region in the known data block into two sub-regions, and accumulates correlation values for each sub-region. The phase detector 1611 detects a phase of the accumulated correlation value for each sub-region. The second delay 1613 delays the detected phase for a time corresponding to a 1/4 data block. The subtracter 1615 obtains a phase difference between the delayed phase and the phase outputted from the accumulator 1611 and outputs the phase difference as a timing frequency error.
[263] In the method of calculating a timing error by using a peak of correlation between the reference known data and the received known data in the time domain, the contribution of the correlation values may affect a channel when the channel is a multi path channel. However, this can be greatly eliminated if the timing error is obtained using the correlation between two received known data. In addition, the timing error can be detected using an entire portion of the known data sequence inserted by the transmitting system, or it can be detected using a portion of the known data sequence which is robust to random or noise data.
[264] More specifically, the present invention is highly protected against (or resistant to) any error that may occur when transmitting mobile service data through a channel. And, the present invention is also highly compatible to the conventional receiving system. Moreover, the present invention may also receive the mobile service data without any error even in channels having severe ghost effect and noise.
[265] Additionally, by inserting known data in a particular position (or place) within a data region and transmitting the processed data, the receiving performance of the receiving system may be enhanced even in a channel environment that is liable to frequent changes. Also, by multiplexing mobile service data with main service data into a burst structure, the power consumption of the receiving system may be reduced. It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that various modifications and variations can be made in the present invention without departing from the spirit or scope of the inventions. Thus, it is intended that the present invention covers the modifications and variations of this invention provided they come within the scope of the appended claims and their equivalents.

Claims

Claims
[1] A digital television (DTV) receiving system comprising: an information detector configured to detect a known data sequence periodically inserted in a digital television (DTV) signal; a resampler configured to resample the DTV signal ; a timing recovery unit configured to perform timing recovery on the DTV signal by detecting a timing error from the resampled DTV signal using the detected known data sequence; and a carrier recovery unit configured to perform carrier recovery on the resampled
DTV signal by estimating a frequency offset value of the resampled DTV signal using the detected known data sequence.
[2] The DTV receiving system of claim 1, wherein the timing recovery unit comprises: a timing error detector configured to detect the timing error from the resampled
DTV signal using the detected known data sequence; a loop filter configured to perform low pass filtering on the detected timing error; and a numerically controlled oscillator (NCO) configured to control a sampling time of the resampler based on the filtered timing error.
[3] The DTV receiving system of claim 1, wherein the timing recovery unit comprises: a first timing error detector configured to detect a first timing error for a first data area of the resampled signal including the known data sequence; a second timing error detector configured to detect a second timing error for a second data area of the resampled signal including no known data sequence; a multiplexer configured to select any one of the first and second timing errors; a loop filter configured to perform low pass filtering on the selected timing error; and a numerically controlled oscillator (NCO) configured to control a sampling time of the resampler based on the filtered timing error.
[4] The DTV receiving system of claim 1, wherein the timing recovery unit comprises: a buffer configured to temporarily store the resampled DTV signal; a decimator configured to decimate the stored DTV signal; a timing error detector configured to detect a timing error from the decimated
DTV signal using the detected known data sequence; a loop filter configured to perform low pass filtering on the detected timing error; a numerically controlled oscillator (NCO configured to control a sampling time of the resampler based on the filtered timing error.
[5] The DTV receiving system of claim 1, wherein the timing error is detected by calculating correlation between the detected known data sequence and a reference data sequence.
[6] The DTV receiving system of claim 5, wherein the timing error is detected by calculating a correlation value between an entire portion of the known data sequence and an entire portion of the reference data sequence.
[7] The DTV receiving system of claim 5, wherein the timing error is detected by calculating correlation values between a plurality of divided portions of the known data sequence and a plurality of divided portions of the reference data sequence, respectively.
[8] The DTV receiving system of claim 1, wherein the timing error is detected by calculating a correlation value between two known data sequences detected by the information detector.
[9] The DTV receiving system of claim 8, wherein the correlation value is calculated in a frequency domain.
[10] The DTV receiving system of claim 2, wherein the timing error is detected by calculating a correlation value between two consecutive known data sequences detected by the information detector.
[11] A method of processing a digital television (DTV) signal in a DTV receiving system, the method comprising: detecting a known data sequence which is periodically inserted in a digital television (DTV) signal; resampling the DTV signal in a resampler; performing timing recovery on the DTV signal by detecting a timing error from the resampled DTV signal using the detected known data sequence; and performing carrier recovery on the resampled DTV signal by estimating a frequency offset value of the resampled DTV signal using the detected known data sequence.
[12] The method of claim 11, wherein performing timing recovery on the DTV signal comprises: detecting the timing error from the resampled DTV signal using the detected known data sequence; performing low pass filtering on the detected timing error information; and controlling a sampling time of the resampler based on the filtered timing error.
[13] The method of claim 11, wherein performing timing recovery on the DTV signal comprises: detecting a first timing error for a first data area of the resampled signal including the known data sequence; detecting a second timing error for a second data area of the resampled signal including no known data sequence; selecting any one of the first and second timing errors; performing low pass filtering on the selected timing error; and controlling a sampling time of the resampler based on the filtered timing error.
[14] The method of claim 11, wherein performing timing recovery on the DTV signal comprises: temporarily storing the resampled DTV signal in a buffer; decimating the stored DTV signal; detecting a timing error from the decimated DTV signal using the detected known data sequence; performing low pass filtering on the detected timing error; and controlling a sampling time of the resampler based on the filtered timing error.
[15] The method of claim 11, wherein the timing error is detected by calculating correlation between the known data sequence and a reference data sequence.
[16] The method of claim 15, wherein the timing error is detected by calculating a correlation value between an entire portion of the known data sequence and an entire portion of the reference data sequence.
[17] The method of claim 15, wherein the timing error is detected by calculating correlation values between a plurality of divided portions of the known data sequences and a plurality of divided portions of the reference data sequences, respectively.
[18] The method of claim 11, wherein the timing error is detected by calculating a correlation value between two known data sequences detected from the DTV signal.
[19] The method of claim 18, wherein the correlation value is calculated in a frequency domain.
[20] The method of claim 11, wherein the timing error is detected by calculating a correlation value between two consecutive known data sequences detected from the DTV signal.
PCT/KR2008/001681 2007-03-26 2008-03-26 Dtv receiving system and method of processing dtv signal WO2008117981A1 (en)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP08723717A EP2130382A4 (en) 2007-03-26 2008-03-26 Dtv receiving system and method of processing dtv signal
CN2008800102455A CN101647289B (en) 2007-03-26 2008-03-26 Dtv receiving system and method of processing dtv signal
MX2009010194A MX2009010194A (en) 2007-03-26 2008-03-26 Dtv receiving system and method of processing dtv signal.
CA2681046A CA2681046C (en) 2007-03-26 2008-03-26 Dtv receiving system and method of processing dtv signal

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020070029474A KR101253185B1 (en) 2007-03-26 2007-03-26 Digital broadcasting system and data processing method
KR10-2007-0029474 2007-03-26
US90862607P 2007-03-28 2007-03-28
US60/908,626 2007-03-28

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2008117981A1 true WO2008117981A1 (en) 2008-10-02

Family

ID=39788680

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/KR2008/001681 WO2008117981A1 (en) 2007-03-26 2008-03-26 Dtv receiving system and method of processing dtv signal

Country Status (8)

Country Link
US (8) US7940855B2 (en)
EP (1) EP2130382A4 (en)
KR (1) KR101253185B1 (en)
CN (1) CN101647289B (en)
AR (1) AR066398A1 (en)
CA (1) CA2681046C (en)
MX (1) MX2009010194A (en)
WO (1) WO2008117981A1 (en)

Cited By (28)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009028857A2 (en) 2007-08-24 2009-03-05 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
CN103053136A (en) * 2010-07-06 2013-04-17 Lg电子株式会社 Home appliance diagnosis system and diagnosis method for same
EP2234357A3 (en) * 2009-03-21 2013-05-22 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG Method for improving the data rate of mobile data and the quality of channel estimation in an ATSC-M/H transport data stream
US8532188B2 (en) 2008-10-02 2013-09-10 Rohde & Schwarz Gmbh & Co. Kg Methods and apparatus for generating a transport data stream with image data
US8553619B2 (en) 2008-07-04 2013-10-08 Rohde & Schwarz Gmbh & Co. Kg Method and a system for time synchronisation between a control centre and several transmitters
US8693507B2 (en) 2008-06-25 2014-04-08 Rohde & Schwarz Gmbh & Co. Kg Apparatus, systems, methods and computer program products for producing a single frequency network for ATSC mobile / handheld services
US8774069B2 (en) 2008-11-06 2014-07-08 Rohde & Schwarz Gmbh & Co. Kg Method and system for synchronized mapping of data packets in an ATSC data stream
US8854204B2 (en) 2009-04-10 2014-10-07 Lg Electronics Inc. Home appliance
US8954829B2 (en) 2007-07-04 2015-02-10 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
US8984381B2 (en) 2006-04-29 2015-03-17 LG Electronics Inc. LLP DTV transmitting system and method of processing broadcast data
US8984338B2 (en) 2009-07-06 2015-03-17 Lg Electronics Inc. Home appliance diagnosis system, and method for operating same
US8983798B2 (en) 2009-07-24 2015-03-17 Lg Electronics Inc. Diagnostic system and method for home appliance
US8989021B2 (en) 2011-01-20 2015-03-24 Rohde & Schwarz Gmbh & Co. Kg Universal broadband broadcasting
US9013320B2 (en) 2012-07-09 2015-04-21 Lg Electronics Inc. Home appliance and its system
US9054953B2 (en) 2008-06-16 2015-06-09 Lg Electronics Inc. Home appliance and home appliance system
US9185413B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2015-11-10 Lg Electronics Inc. Channel equalizer and method of processing broadcast signal in DTV receiving system
US9197437B2 (en) 2011-08-02 2015-11-24 Lg Electronics Inc. Home appliance, home appliance diagnostic system, and method
US9198005B2 (en) 2007-03-26 2015-11-24 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
WO2016040597A1 (en) * 2014-09-11 2016-03-17 Gatesair, Inc. Hybrid modulator utilizing digital domain multiplexing
US9392281B2 (en) 2006-10-12 2016-07-12 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital television transmitting system and receiving system and method of processing broadcasting data
US9495859B2 (en) 2012-07-03 2016-11-15 Lg Electronics Inc. Home appliance and method of outputting signal sound for diagnosis
US9521441B2 (en) 2007-03-30 2016-12-13 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
US9564989B2 (en) 2006-05-23 2017-02-07 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital television transmitting system and receiving system and method of processing broadcast data
US9644886B2 (en) 2010-01-15 2017-05-09 Lg Electronics Inc. Refrigerator and diagnostic system for the same
US9736508B2 (en) 2007-03-26 2017-08-15 Lg Electronics Inc. DTV receiving system and method of processing DTV signal
US9800897B2 (en) 2007-12-11 2017-10-24 Rohde & Schwarz Gmbh & Co. Kg Method and device for forming a common datastream according to the ATSC standard
US9979560B2 (en) 2011-08-18 2018-05-22 Lg Electronics Inc. Diagnostic apparatus and method for home appliance
US10323922B2 (en) 2014-08-29 2019-06-18 Cardioinsight Technologies, Inc. Localization and tracking of an object

Families Citing this family (31)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2007100186A1 (en) * 2006-03-02 2007-09-07 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
US7826498B2 (en) * 2007-01-24 2010-11-02 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
BRPI0807135B1 (en) 2007-02-01 2020-09-24 Rohde & Schwarz Gmbh & Co. Kg APPARATUS AND METHOD TO MAKE A DATA STRUCTURE BE ISSUED IN AN AERIAL INTERFACE OF AN ANTENNA AND MEDIA READABLE BY NON-TRANSITIONAL COMPUTER
KR101253186B1 (en) * 2007-03-26 2013-04-10 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
KR101221914B1 (en) 2007-04-06 2013-01-15 엘지전자 주식회사 Apparatus and method for transmitting Digital broadcasting signal
KR101456002B1 (en) 2007-06-26 2014-11-03 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
KR101405966B1 (en) 2007-06-26 2014-06-20 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
US8433973B2 (en) 2007-07-04 2013-04-30 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
KR20090002855A (en) * 2007-07-04 2009-01-09 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcast system and method of processing signal
KR20090004061A (en) * 2007-07-06 2009-01-12 엘지전자 주식회사 Telematics terminal capable of receiving broadcast and method of processing broadcast signal
KR20090012180A (en) 2007-07-28 2009-02-02 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
US7646828B2 (en) * 2007-08-24 2010-01-12 Lg Electronics, Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
KR101556133B1 (en) 2007-08-24 2015-09-30 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
CA2697453C (en) 2007-08-24 2013-10-08 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
KR101559771B1 (en) 2007-09-21 2015-10-13 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
WO2009038402A1 (en) 2007-09-21 2009-03-26 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and data processing method in the digital broadcasting system
US8199811B2 (en) 2008-02-18 2012-06-12 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcast system and data processing method
US8121232B2 (en) * 2008-11-06 2012-02-21 Lg Electronics Inc. Transmitting/receiving system and method of processing broadcast signal in transmitting/receiving system
KR101657501B1 (en) * 2009-01-07 2016-09-19 엘지전자 주식회사 Apparatus and Method Of Tranmsitting A Signal
CN102292986B (en) * 2009-02-12 2013-12-11 Lg电子株式会社 Apparatus for transmitting and receiving a signal and method of transmitting and receiving a signal
US8209584B2 (en) * 2009-03-18 2012-06-26 Lg Electronics Inc. Transmitting/receiving system and method of processing broadcasting signal in transmitting/receiving system
KR101580517B1 (en) * 2009-04-15 2015-12-28 엘지전자 주식회사 Broadcast receiving system and method of processing broadcast signal
WO2010134786A2 (en) 2009-05-21 2010-11-25 삼성전자 Digital broadcasting transmitter, digital broadcasting receiver, and method for configuring and processing a stream for same
KR101743123B1 (en) * 2009-05-21 2017-06-15 삼성전자주식회사 Digital broadcast transmitter, digital broadcast receiver, methods for constructing and processing streams thereof
US9253000B2 (en) * 2009-12-29 2016-02-02 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method for transmitting and receiving digital broadcast signal
JP6703364B2 (en) * 2014-04-10 2020-06-03 ザインエレクトロニクス株式会社 Receiver
KR102380285B1 (en) * 2015-10-14 2022-03-30 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving packet in multimedia system
US10256845B1 (en) * 2018-02-26 2019-04-09 International Business Machines Corporation Symbol timing recovery based on speculative tentative symbol decisions
CN110324269B (en) * 2019-06-24 2022-01-04 西安空间无线电技术研究所 Symbol synchronization system of high-speed demodulator and implementation method
WO2022036434A2 (en) * 2020-04-06 2022-02-24 National Research Council Of Canada Apparatus and method for scalable digitization
US11502756B2 (en) * 2020-06-23 2022-11-15 Infinera Corporation Data synchronization in optical networks and devices

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20020187767A1 (en) * 2001-05-02 2002-12-12 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Timing recovery switching for an adaptive digital broadband beamforming (antenna diversity) for ATSC terrestrial DTV based on segment sync detection
US20030206053A1 (en) * 2002-04-04 2003-11-06 Jingsong Xia Carrier recovery for DTV receivers
US20060078072A1 (en) * 2004-10-12 2006-04-13 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Synchronization signal detection circuit and method of digital television (DTV) receiver

Family Cites Families (440)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4642755A (en) 1983-03-31 1987-02-10 At&T Bell Laboratories Shared memory with two distinct addressing structures
US5208816A (en) 1989-08-18 1993-05-04 At&T Bell Laboratories Generalized viterbi decoding algorithms
US5177796A (en) 1990-10-19 1993-01-05 International Business Machines Corporation Image data processing of correlated images
CA2074889C (en) 1991-07-30 1997-12-09 Motoya Iwasaki Carrier frequency error detector capable of accurately detecting a carrier frequency error
JPH06508805A (en) 1991-08-05 1994-10-06 ザ、ブロクター、エンド、ギャンブル、カンパニー plug-in handle
US5544060A (en) 1991-10-16 1996-08-06 Zexel Usa Corporation Vehicle mounted navigation system with preview function
US5892879A (en) 1992-03-26 1999-04-06 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Communication system for plural data streams
US5258987A (en) 1992-04-16 1993-11-02 At&T Bell Laboratories Multilevel coding using trellis-coded modulation and reed-solomon codes
US5301167A (en) 1992-08-05 1994-04-05 Northeastern University Apparatus for improved underwater acoustic telemetry utilizing phase coherent communications
FI940322A (en) 1993-01-25 1994-07-26 Hughes Aircraft Co Improved error correction decoder and method for receivers in digital cellular communication systems
US5488635A (en) 1993-10-29 1996-01-30 General Electric Company Low complexity adaptive equalizer radio receiver employing reduced complexity branch metric calculation
KR960010495B1 (en) 1993-11-04 1996-08-01 대우전자 주식회사 Channel equalizer
US5583562A (en) 1993-12-03 1996-12-10 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. System and method for transmitting a plurality of digital services including imaging services
US5511096A (en) 1994-01-18 1996-04-23 Gi Corporation Quadrature amplitude modulated data for standard bandwidth television channel
JP2853553B2 (en) 1994-02-22 1999-02-03 日本電気株式会社 Video coding method
US6803970B1 (en) 1994-03-24 2004-10-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Digital television receiver with match filter responsive to field synchronization code
JP3622203B2 (en) * 1994-03-30 2005-02-23 ソニー株式会社 Digital switcher
US5508752A (en) 1994-04-12 1996-04-16 Lg Electronics Inc. Partial response trellis decoder for high definition television (HDTV) system
US5903324A (en) 1994-06-30 1999-05-11 Thomson Multimedia S.A. Transport processor interface for a digital television system
US5583889A (en) 1994-07-08 1996-12-10 Zenith Electronics Corporation Trellis coded modulation system for HDTV
US5619269A (en) 1995-06-07 1997-04-08 Zenith Electronics Corporation Frame sync signal for digital transmission system
US5691993A (en) 1995-06-07 1997-11-25 Seagate Technology, Inc. Rate 4/5 trellis code for PR4 channels with improved error propagation
US6307868B1 (en) 1995-08-25 2001-10-23 Terayon Communication Systems, Inc. Apparatus and method for SCDMA digital data transmission using orthogonal codes and a head end modem with no tracking loops
US6665308B1 (en) 1995-08-25 2003-12-16 Terayon Communication Systems, Inc. Apparatus and method for equalization in distributed digital data transmission systems
KR0166923B1 (en) 1995-09-18 1999-03-20 구자홍 Method and apparatus of preventing an illegal watching and copying in a digital broadcasting system
BR9611138A (en) 1995-10-24 1999-12-28 Gen Instrument Corp Transmission of variable length signal sequences through the physical layer of a multi-layer transmission format
US5771239A (en) 1995-11-17 1998-06-23 General Instrument Corporation Of Delaware Method and apparatus for modifying a transport packet stream to provide concatenated synchronization bytes at interleaver output
US5956373A (en) 1995-11-17 1999-09-21 Usa Digital Radio Partners, L.P. AM compatible digital audio broadcasting signal transmision using digitally modulated orthogonal noise-like sequences
JP3369874B2 (en) 1995-11-21 2003-01-20 インターナショナル・ビジネス・マシーンズ・コーポレーション Device for detecting configuration parameters of asynchronous data link
US5867503A (en) 1996-01-30 1999-02-02 Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha Digital sound broadcasting receiver and automatic phase controlling method therefor
IL117348A (en) 1996-03-04 2002-03-10 Oren Semiconductor Ltd Enhanced dsp apparatus
US6314420B1 (en) 1996-04-04 2001-11-06 Lycos, Inc. Collaborative/adaptive search engine
US5754651A (en) 1996-05-31 1998-05-19 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. Processing and storage of digital data and program specific information
KR100222680B1 (en) 1996-07-09 1999-10-01 윤종용 Method and apparatus for switching of operating mode in a high definition television system
JPH1174868A (en) 1996-09-02 1999-03-16 Toshiba Corp Information transmission method, coder/decoder in information transmission system adopting the method, coding multiplexer/decoding inverse multiplexer
US6266370B1 (en) 1996-09-03 2001-07-24 Nippon Telegraph And Telephone Corporation Brightness-variation compensation method and coding/decoding apparatus for moving pictures
JP3684560B2 (en) * 1996-09-03 2005-08-17 ソニー株式会社 Data receiving apparatus and method
JPH10154373A (en) 1996-09-27 1998-06-09 Sony Corp Data decoding system and method thereof, transmission unit and method thereof and receiver device and method thereof
US5978424A (en) 1996-11-18 1999-11-02 Zenith Electronics Corporation Frame identification system
US6148026A (en) 1997-01-08 2000-11-14 At&T Corp. Mesh node coding to enable object based functionalities within a motion compensated transform video coder
US6005894A (en) 1997-04-04 1999-12-21 Kumar; Derek D. AM-compatible digital broadcasting method and system
DE69841928D1 (en) 1997-05-30 2010-11-18 Qualcomm Inc Error protection for over-the-air data transmission
US6334187B1 (en) 1997-07-03 2001-12-25 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Information embedding method, information extracting method, information embedding apparatus, information extracting apparatus, and recording media
JPH1127641A (en) 1997-07-07 1999-01-29 Toshiba Corp Television receiver
US6219386B1 (en) 1997-07-21 2001-04-17 Globespan, Inc. Frameless reed-solomon coding system and method
US6904110B2 (en) 1997-07-31 2005-06-07 Francois Trans Channel equalization system and method
EP0899703B1 (en) 1997-08-25 2002-10-30 Texas Instruments France A navigational system
US6665343B1 (en) 1997-09-12 2003-12-16 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Methods and arrangements for a converting a high definition image to a lower definition image using wavelet transforms
EP0903886B1 (en) 1997-09-18 2006-03-15 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Information transmission method and apparatus for combining multiplexing and encryption
JP3389843B2 (en) 1997-10-17 2003-03-24 日本電気株式会社 Digital broadcast receiving system in information processing device
WO1999021323A2 (en) 1997-10-20 1999-04-29 Wireless Facilities Inc. Wireless multimedia carrier system
JPH11127138A (en) 1997-10-24 1999-05-11 Sony Corp Error correction coding method, device therefor, and data transmission method
US6356598B1 (en) 1998-08-26 2002-03-12 Thomson Licensing S.A. Demodulator for an HDTV receiver
US6233295B1 (en) 1998-08-26 2001-05-15 Thomson Licensing S.A. Segment sync recovery network for an HDTV receiver
KR100396507B1 (en) 1997-11-17 2003-12-24 삼성전자주식회사 Forward link communicating apparatus of communication system using multicarrier and method for implementing the same
JP3096020B2 (en) 1997-12-16 2000-10-10 日本放送協会 Transmitter and receiver
JPH11261906A (en) 1998-01-12 1999-09-24 Sony Corp Television broadcast receiver, television broadcast reception method and television broadcast method
DE19802134A1 (en) 1998-01-21 1999-07-22 Basf Ag Use of carotenoid aggregates as colorants
US6405338B1 (en) 1998-02-11 2002-06-11 Lucent Technologies Inc. Unequal error protection for perceptual audio coders
US6226380B1 (en) 1998-02-19 2001-05-01 Nortel Networks Limited Method of distinguishing between echo path change and double talk conditions in an echo canceller
US6130894A (en) 1998-03-09 2000-10-10 Broadcom Homenetworking, Inc. Off-line broadband network interface
US6351290B1 (en) 1998-03-23 2002-02-26 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Television receiver with separate I-F amplifiers for VSB and QAM digital TV signals that are digitally synchrodyned
US6459427B1 (en) 1998-04-01 2002-10-01 Liberate Technologies Apparatus and method for web-casting over digital broadcast TV network
US6272660B1 (en) 1998-04-03 2001-08-07 Agere Systems Guardian Corp. Screening for errors in data transmission systems
US20020080992A1 (en) 2000-12-21 2002-06-27 Decker Stephen K. Watermarking holograms
US6433835B1 (en) * 1998-04-17 2002-08-13 Encamera Sciences Corporation Expanded information capacity for existing communication transmission systems
US6310919B1 (en) 1998-05-07 2001-10-30 Sarnoff Corporation Method and apparatus for adaptively scaling motion vector information in an information stream decoder
US7038732B1 (en) 1998-05-12 2006-05-02 Samsung Electronics Company, Ltd. DTV signal with GCR components in plural-data-segment frame headers and receiver apparatus for such signal
US6738949B2 (en) 1998-05-13 2004-05-18 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Error correction circuit and error correction method
JP4324276B2 (en) 1998-06-03 2009-09-02 株式会社日立グローバルストレージテクノロジーズ Magnetic disk error correction method and apparatus
US6124898A (en) 1998-06-19 2000-09-26 Samsung Elctronics Co., Ltd. Digital television receiver with equalization performed on digital intermediate-frequency signals
US6931198B1 (en) 1998-07-15 2005-08-16 Sony Corporation Apparatus and method for downloading desired data signal to user-selectable storage unit
JP2000050268A (en) 1998-07-31 2000-02-18 Minolta Co Ltd Image coding device
US7079584B2 (en) 1998-08-10 2006-07-18 Kamilo Feher OFDM, CDMA, spread spectrum, TDMA, cross-correlated and filtered modulation
FR2783120B1 (en) 1998-09-04 2000-11-24 Nortel Matra Cellular DIGITAL EQUALIZATION METHOD, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION RECEIVER IMPLEMENTING SUCH A METHOD
US6636892B1 (en) 1998-09-11 2003-10-21 Lv Partners, L.P. Method for conducting a contest using a network
US6490628B2 (en) 1998-09-25 2002-12-03 Intel Corporation Modem using a digital signal processor and a signal based command set
KR100378058B1 (en) 1998-09-28 2003-03-29 마쯔시다덴기산교 가부시키가이샤 Vsb receiver
JP3968545B2 (en) 1998-10-28 2007-08-29 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Manufacturing method of microlens array
US6775334B1 (en) 1998-11-03 2004-08-10 Broadcom Corporation Equalization and decision-directed loops with trellis demodulation in high definition TV
JP3645721B2 (en) 1998-11-27 2005-05-11 株式会社ケンウッド Demodulator
US6456611B1 (en) 1998-12-04 2002-09-24 Nortel Networks Limited CDMA modem using common block architecture
KR100304115B1 (en) 1998-12-18 2001-09-24 이계철 User identification method using sync burst in wireless communication system
US6515713B1 (en) 1998-12-31 2003-02-04 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus which compensates for channel distortion
US6498936B1 (en) 1999-01-22 2002-12-24 Ericsson Inc. Methods and systems for coding of broadcast messages
EP1022884A1 (en) 1999-01-25 2000-07-26 CANAL+ Société Anonyme Address assignment in a digital transmission system
CN1293847A (en) 1999-01-28 2001-05-02 皇家菲利浦电子有限公司 Synchronisation of decryption keys in data packet transmission system
JP3743742B2 (en) 1999-02-01 2006-02-08 株式会社日立国際電気 Data transmission system
US6810090B1 (en) 1999-02-18 2004-10-26 Sarnoff Corporation Direct digital vestigial sideband (VSB) modulator
US6993021B1 (en) 1999-03-08 2006-01-31 Lucent Technologies Inc. Lightweight internet protocol encapsulation (LIPE) scheme for multimedia traffic transport
US6542808B2 (en) 1999-03-08 2003-04-01 Josef Mintz Method and system for mapping traffic congestion
US6446234B1 (en) 1999-03-16 2002-09-03 International Business Machines Corporation Method and apparatus for updating cyclic redundancy check information for data storage
US6765931B1 (en) 1999-04-13 2004-07-20 Broadcom Corporation Gateway with voice
US6909743B1 (en) 1999-04-14 2005-06-21 Sarnoff Corporation Method for generating and processing transition streams
WO2000064058A1 (en) 1999-04-16 2000-10-26 Fujitsu Limited Encoder and decoder
US6687310B1 (en) 1999-05-27 2004-02-03 Zenith Electronics Corporation Trellis coded modulation system for digital television signal with trellis coded data and synchronization symbols
US6529558B1 (en) 1999-05-27 2003-03-04 Zenith Electronics Corporation Coding and decoding a signal modified in accordance with the feedback states of an encoder
EP1061746A1 (en) 1999-06-14 2000-12-20 Sony International (Europe) GmbH Channel decoder for a digital broadcast receiver
KR100617778B1 (en) 1999-07-07 2006-08-28 삼성전자주식회사 Appasratus and method for compensating degradation of a received signal
US6577685B1 (en) 1999-08-02 2003-06-10 Mitsubishi Electric Research Laboratories, Inc. Programmable digital signal processor for demodulating digital television signals
US6775521B1 (en) 1999-08-09 2004-08-10 Broadcom Corporation Bad frame indicator for radio telephone receivers
US6985537B1 (en) 1999-09-15 2006-01-10 Lucent Technologies Inc. Symbol self synchronous interleaving method and apparatus for OFDM-based communication system
US7102692B1 (en) 1999-10-13 2006-09-05 Thomson Licensing Digital and analog television signal digitization and processing device
JP4250832B2 (en) 1999-10-14 2009-04-08 三菱電機株式会社 Data transmission device
US6459741B1 (en) 1999-10-21 2002-10-01 General Electric Company Implementation of N-VSB training sequences in N-squared QAM receiver structures
WO2001043310A2 (en) 1999-12-03 2001-06-14 Broadcom Corporation Embedded training sequences for carrier acquisition and tracking
US6816204B2 (en) 2000-01-19 2004-11-09 Allen Le Roy Limberg Ghost cancellation reference signals for broadcast digital television signal receivers and receivers for utilizing them
US6985420B2 (en) 2000-01-21 2006-01-10 Sony Corporation Optically recorded data discrimination apparatus and associated methodology
AU2001243476A1 (en) 2000-03-07 2001-09-17 Vyyo, Ltd. Adaptive downstream modulation scheme for broadband wireless access systems
JP3660555B2 (en) 2000-03-27 2005-06-15 株式会社日立製作所 Digital broadcast receiving apparatus and digital broadcast receiving method
US6975689B1 (en) 2000-03-30 2005-12-13 Mcdonald James Douglas Digital modulation signal receiver with adaptive channel equalization employing discrete fourier transforms
US7080396B2 (en) 2000-04-14 2006-07-18 Lg Electronics Inc. Event overrun and downstream event shift technology
US6996133B2 (en) 2000-04-18 2006-02-07 Zenith Electronics Corporation Digital communication system for transmitting and receiving robustly encoded data
US6963618B2 (en) 2000-04-18 2005-11-08 Zenith Electronics Corporation Enhanced slice prediction feedback
US6694518B1 (en) * 2000-05-30 2004-02-17 Hughes Electronics Corporation Method and apparatus for carrying data across high definition analog component video interfaces
KR100360622B1 (en) 2000-06-12 2002-11-13 주식회사 문화방송 MPEG Data frame structure and transmitting and receiving system using the same
US6650880B1 (en) 2000-06-12 2003-11-18 Broadcom Corporation Wireless data communications using FIFO for synchronization memory
US6411253B1 (en) 2000-06-14 2002-06-25 Raytheon Company Equalization system using general purpose filter architecture
CN1383669A (en) 2000-06-28 2002-12-04 索尼公司 Additional information embedding device and additional information embedding method
US6912258B2 (en) 2000-07-07 2005-06-28 Koninklijke Philips Electtronics N.V. Frequency-domain equalizer for terrestrial digital TV reception
US20030093798A1 (en) 2000-07-10 2003-05-15 Michael Rogerson Modular entertainment system configured for multiple broadband content delivery incorporating a distributed server
US6768517B2 (en) 2000-07-11 2004-07-27 Allen Le Roy Limberg Repetitive-PN1023-sequence echo-cancellation reference signal for single-carrier digital television broadcast systems
US6744822B1 (en) 2000-08-14 2004-06-01 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. FEC scheme for encoding two bit-streams
US7406104B2 (en) 2000-08-25 2008-07-29 Lin Yang Terrestrial digital multimedia/television broadcasting system
US6693984B1 (en) 2000-08-29 2004-02-17 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Method and apparatus for compensating for intersymbol interference in a received signal
WO2002019552A2 (en) 2000-09-01 2002-03-07 Broadcom Corporation Satellite receiver
KR100672561B1 (en) 2000-09-22 2007-01-23 엘지전자 주식회사 Communication system of digital TV
KR100351829B1 (en) 2000-09-26 2002-09-11 엘지전자 주식회사 digital communication system
KR100351831B1 (en) 2000-10-02 2002-09-11 엘지전자 주식회사 VSB transmission system
US20020046406A1 (en) 2000-10-18 2002-04-18 Majid Chelehmal On-demand data system
KR100877447B1 (en) 2000-10-24 2009-01-07 노오텔 네트웍스 리미티드 Shared channel structure, arq systems and methods
US6686880B1 (en) 2000-10-25 2004-02-03 Xm Satellite Radio, Inc. Method and apparatus for prompting a reverse channel response from receiver in a digital broadcast system
US6560303B1 (en) 2000-10-26 2003-05-06 Comsat Corporation Joint frame, carrier and clock synchronization scheme
US7224935B2 (en) 2000-11-29 2007-05-29 Visteon Global Technologies, Inc. Telematics application for implementation in conjunction with a satellite broadcast delivery system
US6744474B2 (en) 2000-12-13 2004-06-01 Thomson Licensing S.A. Recursive metric for NTSC interference rejection in the ATSC-HDTV trellis decoder
KR100673419B1 (en) 2000-12-28 2007-01-24 엘지전자 주식회사 Transmitting system and data processing method
US6731700B1 (en) 2001-01-04 2004-05-04 Comsys Communication & Signal Processing Ltd. Soft decision output generator
US6944242B2 (en) 2001-01-04 2005-09-13 Comsys Communication & Signal Processing Ltd. Apparatus for and method of converting soft symbol information to soft bit information
US6511621B2 (en) 2001-01-11 2003-01-28 Mitsubishi Heavy Industries, Ltd. Method for injection-molding a propeller fan
JP2002218339A (en) 2001-01-16 2002-08-02 Sharp Corp Digital broadcast receiver
KR100674423B1 (en) 2001-01-19 2007-01-29 엘지전자 주식회사 Transmitting/receiving system and data processing method
US20020136197A1 (en) 2001-02-09 2002-09-26 Sarnoff Corporation Enhanced frame structure for use in advanced television systems committee standards broadcast
WO2002065657A1 (en) 2001-02-13 2002-08-22 Elastic Networks, Inc. System and method for improved data transmission speed by fixing the lower corner frequency at a frequency above voice band in a symmetric dsl transmission system
US7065703B2 (en) 2001-02-14 2006-06-20 Conexant Systems, Inc. Synchronization of a communications system
US20020150167A1 (en) 2001-02-17 2002-10-17 Victor Demjanenko Methods and apparatus for configurable or assymetric forward error correction
US6977977B1 (en) 2001-02-20 2005-12-20 Comsys Communication & Signal Processing Ltd. Compensation of I/Q gain mismatch in a communications receiver
US6470047B1 (en) 2001-02-20 2002-10-22 Comsys Communications Signal Processing Ltd. Apparatus for and method of reducing interference in a communications receiver
US7050419B2 (en) 2001-02-23 2006-05-23 Terayon Communicaion Systems, Inc. Head end receiver for digital data delivery systems using mixed mode SCDMA and TDMA multiplexing
US7170849B1 (en) 2001-03-19 2007-01-30 Cisco Systems Wireless Networking (Australia) Pty Limited Interleaver, deinterleaver, interleaving method, and deinterleaving method for OFDM data
US7093179B2 (en) 2001-03-22 2006-08-15 University Of Florida Method and coding means for error-correction utilizing concatenated parity and turbo codes
US7111221B2 (en) 2001-04-02 2006-09-19 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Digital transmission system for an enhanced ATSC 8-VSB system
US7206352B2 (en) 2001-04-02 2007-04-17 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. ATSC digital television system
US7675994B2 (en) 2001-04-02 2010-03-09 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Packet identification mechanism at the transmitter and receiver for an enhanced ATSC 8-VSB system
US6937648B2 (en) 2001-04-03 2005-08-30 Yitran Communications Ltd Equalizer for communication over noisy channels
US7042949B1 (en) 2001-04-03 2006-05-09 Rosum Corporation Robust data transmission using broadcast digital television signals
US6919930B2 (en) 2001-04-06 2005-07-19 Zenith Electronics Corporation Digital television signal translator
US6925126B2 (en) 2001-04-18 2005-08-02 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Dynamic complexity prediction and regulation of MPEG2 decoding in a media processor
US7631340B2 (en) 2001-04-18 2009-12-08 Lg Electronics Inc. VSB communication system
US6947487B2 (en) 2001-04-18 2005-09-20 Lg Electronics Inc. VSB communication system
KR100734351B1 (en) 2001-04-20 2007-07-03 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting transmit system
US6734920B2 (en) 2001-04-23 2004-05-11 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. System and method for reducing error propagation in a decision feedback equalizer of ATSC VSB receiver
KR100736500B1 (en) 2001-04-25 2007-07-06 엘지전자 주식회사 Communication system of VSB digital TV
KR100706508B1 (en) 2001-04-25 2007-04-11 엘지전자 주식회사 Communication system of VSB digital TV
JP4038996B2 (en) 2001-04-27 2008-01-30 松下電器産業株式会社 Signal processing apparatus and signal processing method
FI111776B (en) 2001-05-28 2003-09-15 Nokia Corp Forwarding control messages on packet data network control channels
FI20011111A (en) 2001-05-28 2002-11-29 Nokia Corp Forwarding connection set-up parameters in a packet data network
US20030099303A1 (en) 2001-06-04 2003-05-29 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Digital television (DTV) transmission system using enhanced coding schemes
US7190744B2 (en) 2001-06-07 2007-03-13 Micronas Semiconductors, Inc. Error generation for adaptive equalizer
KR100850932B1 (en) 2001-06-11 2008-08-12 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital transmit system and method
KR100793766B1 (en) 2001-06-11 2008-01-10 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital transmit system and method
US20040028076A1 (en) 2001-06-30 2004-02-12 Strolle Christopher H Robust data extension for 8vsb signaling
US7295623B2 (en) 2001-07-11 2007-11-13 Vativ Technologies, Inc. High-speed communications transceiver
JP2003032640A (en) 2001-07-19 2003-01-31 Nippon Hoso Kyokai <Nhk> Program specific information sending equipment and system thereof
WO2003009578A2 (en) 2001-07-19 2003-01-30 Thomson Licensing S.A. Robust reception of digital broadcast transmission
WO2003009197A1 (en) 2001-07-19 2003-01-30 Catalina Marketing International, Inc. Method of and system for distributing electronic coupons over a network after the consummation of a purchase transaction based on a client's purchase history
JP2003037623A (en) 2001-07-23 2003-02-07 Philips Japan Ltd Direct rtp delivery method and system over mpeg network
GB0120033D0 (en) 2001-08-16 2001-10-10 Fujitsu Ltd Cell selection
KR100510679B1 (en) 2003-03-21 2005-08-31 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital VSB transmitting system and enhanced data multiplexing method in a VSB transmitting system
CA2460951A1 (en) 2001-09-19 2003-03-27 Keun-Suk Jang Windmill blade and apparatus for generating power using the blade
CA2404404A1 (en) 2001-09-24 2003-03-24 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. An improved digital transmission system for an enhanced atsc 8-vsb system
US6924753B2 (en) 2001-09-24 2005-08-02 Zenith Electronics Corporation Robust system for transmitting and receiving map data
US6927708B2 (en) 2001-09-24 2005-08-09 Zenith Electronics Corporation Mapping system for transmission and reception of multiple data types
JP2003101812A (en) 2001-09-26 2003-04-04 Hitachi Ltd Receiving system and portable terminal
US7343487B2 (en) 2001-10-10 2008-03-11 Nokia Corporation Datacast distribution system
US7218672B2 (en) 2001-10-16 2007-05-15 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Apparatus and method for constraining the value of feedback filter tap coefficients in a decision feedback equalizer
KR100440687B1 (en) 2001-11-02 2004-07-15 한국전자통신연구원 System for transceiving information of digital cable broadcast and method thereof
EP1315148A1 (en) 2001-11-17 2003-05-28 Deutsche Thomson-Brandt Gmbh Determination of the presence of ancillary data in an audio bitstream
US6973137B2 (en) 2001-12-03 2005-12-06 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Apparatus and method for generating robust ATSC 8-VSB bit streams
US8045935B2 (en) 2001-12-06 2011-10-25 Pulse-Link, Inc. High data rate transmitter and receiver
US7406647B2 (en) 2001-12-06 2008-07-29 Pulse-Link, Inc. Systems and methods for forward error correction in a wireless communication network
JP3969096B2 (en) 2002-01-16 2007-08-29 日本電気株式会社 Digital broadcasting transmission / reception system
JP4109003B2 (en) 2002-01-21 2008-06-25 富士通株式会社 Information recording / reproducing apparatus, signal decoding circuit and method
US7130313B2 (en) 2002-02-14 2006-10-31 Nokia Corporation Time-slice signaling for broadband digital broadcasting
US20040022278A1 (en) 2002-02-28 2004-02-05 Thomas Charles Gomer Localization and targeting of data in broadcast streams
JP2003284037A (en) 2002-03-26 2003-10-03 Toshiba Corp Multimedia data reception device and method therefor, and multimedia data transmission device and method therefor
KR100406122B1 (en) 2002-03-29 2003-11-14 한국전자통신연구원 Apparatus and method for injecting synchronized data for digital data broadcasting
EP1497916B1 (en) 2002-04-16 2012-08-15 Thomson Licensing Decision feedback equalizer
KR20040102096A (en) 2002-04-17 2004-12-03 톰슨 라이센싱 소시에떼 아노님 Equalizer status monitor
WO2003090461A1 (en) 2002-04-17 2003-10-30 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Kalman-viterbi joint channel equalizer
BRPI0309317A8 (en) 2002-04-19 2018-05-08 Thomson Licensing Sa channel acquisition processing for a television receiver
KR100754721B1 (en) 2002-04-26 2007-09-03 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for transmitting and receiving multiplexed data in an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing communication system
US20030212948A1 (en) 2002-05-07 2003-11-13 Mustafa Eroz Synchronization scheme in a turbo decoder based FEC system
US7548984B2 (en) 2002-05-27 2009-06-16 Panasonic Corporation Stream distribution system, stream server device, cache server device, stream record/playback device, related methods and computer programs
US20030223516A1 (en) 2002-05-28 2003-12-04 Xinying Zhang Sequential bezout space-time equalizers for MIMO systems
KR100859876B1 (en) 2002-05-28 2008-09-24 삼성전자주식회사 Equalizer of ??? receiver capable of equalizing using the segment sync information
KR100466237B1 (en) 2002-06-20 2005-01-13 한국전자통신연구원 Method and system for converting protocol of digital broadcasting system
US7376186B2 (en) 2002-07-15 2008-05-20 Thomson Licensing Motion estimation with weighting prediction
US7346013B2 (en) 2002-07-18 2008-03-18 Coherent Logix, Incorporated Frequency domain equalization of communication signals
US7151575B1 (en) 2002-07-18 2006-12-19 Entropic Communications, Inc. Wireless extension for cable television signals
KR100464034B1 (en) 2002-07-19 2005-01-03 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for clock synchronizing
US7194047B2 (en) 2002-09-20 2007-03-20 Ati Technologies Inc. Receiver for robust data extension for 8VSB signaling
US7221358B2 (en) 2002-09-24 2007-05-22 Fujitsu Ten Limited In-vehicle digital broadcast reception apparatus
KR100482286B1 (en) 2002-09-27 2005-04-13 한국전자통신연구원 Digital broadcasting service receiver for improving reception ability by switched beamforming
KR101011121B1 (en) 2002-10-01 2011-01-25 파나소닉 주식회사 Picture decoding device, and method using the same
JP3916542B2 (en) 2002-10-07 2007-05-16 沖電気工業株式会社 Address assignment system
KR100920723B1 (en) 2002-10-08 2009-10-07 삼성전자주식회사 Single carrier transmission system capable of acclimating dynamic environment and a method therefore
US7116703B2 (en) 2002-10-15 2006-10-03 Thomson Licensing Multipath signal strength indicator
JP2004146982A (en) 2002-10-23 2004-05-20 Sony Corp Coder, coding method, program for the coding method, decoder, decoding method, and program for the decoding method
JP2006506028A (en) 2002-11-04 2006-02-16 コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ Configuration to implement extended VSB on the studio side
KR100523054B1 (en) 2002-11-19 2005-10-24 한국전자통신연구원 Controlling apparatus for storing and playing digital broadcasting contents
KR100985578B1 (en) 2002-12-03 2010-10-07 삼성전자주식회사 Channel equalizer interactiving with Trellis coded modulation and a method equalizing thereof
US7502589B2 (en) 2002-12-06 2009-03-10 Bose Corporation Supplemental broadcast data processing
KR100463544B1 (en) 2002-12-14 2004-12-29 엘지전자 주식회사 Channel equalizer and digital TV receiver using for the same
US7564905B2 (en) 2002-12-20 2009-07-21 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute System and method for providing terrestrial digital broadcasting service using single frequency network
US6977914B2 (en) 2002-12-23 2005-12-20 Nokia Corporation Broadcast hand-over in a wireless network
US7197685B2 (en) 2003-01-02 2007-03-27 Samsung Electronics, Co., Ltd. Robust signal transmission in digital television broadcasting
WO2004062283A1 (en) 2003-01-06 2004-07-22 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Digital television transmitter and receiver for transmitting and receiving dual stream using 4 level vestigial side band robust data
KR100510861B1 (en) 2003-01-18 2005-08-31 디지피아(주) Training signal determining method in OFDM system and apparatus and method for receiving OFDM signal using the training signal
KR20040071546A (en) 2003-02-06 2004-08-12 삼성전자주식회사 Digital communication system capable of improving performance equalization according to channel state and a method operating thereof
KR20040074345A (en) 2003-02-17 2004-08-25 엘지전자 주식회사 Control device for navigation system
US20040181811A1 (en) 2003-03-13 2004-09-16 Rakib Selim Shlomo Thin DOCSIS in-band management for interactive HFC service delivery
CN1286317C (en) * 2003-03-25 2006-11-22 乐金电子(沈阳)有限公司 Digital TV and its information providing method
US7590917B2 (en) * 2003-05-01 2009-09-15 Alcatel-Lucent Usa Inc. Parameter generation for interleavers
JP2004336527A (en) 2003-05-09 2004-11-25 Pioneer Electronic Corp Data processor, system therefor, method therefor, program therefor, and recording medium with its program recorded therein
GB2402307A (en) 2003-05-30 2004-12-01 Nokia Corp Encapsulating irregular burst transmissions with overhead information specifying the timing interval to the next burst
KR20040104238A (en) 2003-06-03 2004-12-10 삼성전자주식회사 Receiving apparatus for digital broadcasting system and method of using the same
US20060159183A1 (en) 2003-06-30 2006-07-20 Koninkijkle Phillips Electronics N.V. Receiver and packet formatter for decoding an atsc dtv signal
KR20050008431A (en) 2003-07-15 2005-01-21 삼성전자주식회사 Digital broadcasting transmission/reception capable of improving a receiving performance and a method signal processing thereof
KR100585933B1 (en) 2003-08-20 2006-06-01 한국전자통신연구원 System ? Method for Digital Multimedia Broadcasting
JP3970225B2 (en) 2003-08-28 2007-09-05 キヤノン株式会社 Information processing apparatus, information processing method, program, and storage medium
US7221680B2 (en) 2003-09-02 2007-05-22 Qualcomm Incorporated Multiplexing and transmission of multiple data streams in a wireless multi-carrier communication system
US8509051B2 (en) 2003-09-02 2013-08-13 Qualcomm Incorporated Multiplexing and transmission of multiple data streams in a wireless multi-carrier communication system
US7334181B2 (en) * 2003-09-04 2008-02-19 The Directv Group, Inc. Method and system for providing short block length low density parity check (LDPC) codes
KR100640935B1 (en) 2003-09-16 2006-11-02 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital TV Receiver and Self Examination Method of the Same
JP2005094354A (en) 2003-09-17 2005-04-07 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Digital broadcast receiver
GB2406483A (en) 2003-09-29 2005-03-30 Nokia Corp Burst transmission
US8145120B2 (en) 2003-10-27 2012-03-27 Nokia Corporation Apparatus, system, method and computer program product for service selection and sorting
KR100683179B1 (en) 2003-11-03 2007-02-15 삼성전자주식회사 Digital broadcast transmitter/receiver system for dual stream having a error correction coding/decoding apparatus and a method error correction coding/decoding thereof
KR100519361B1 (en) 2003-11-24 2005-10-07 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital Enhanced 8-VSB receiving system and E8-VSB data demultiplexing method in a E8-VSB receiving system
US7599348B2 (en) 2003-11-04 2009-10-06 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital E8-VSB reception system and E8-VSB data demultiplexing method
JP2005159779A (en) 2003-11-27 2005-06-16 Hitachi Ltd Receiver, display apparatus, and recording apparatus
KR100608113B1 (en) 2003-12-26 2006-08-04 한국전자통신연구원 Digital audio decoder and digital audio player including error handler
WO2005064942A1 (en) 2003-12-27 2005-07-14 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Geographic information transceiving system and method thereof
KR100640390B1 (en) 2004-01-17 2006-10-30 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus for inserting and extracting value added data in mpeg-2 system with transport stream and method thereof
KR100896684B1 (en) 2004-01-27 2009-05-14 삼성전자주식회사 Digital broadcasting transmission/reception capable of improving receiving performance and signal processing method thereof
RU2350039C2 (en) * 2004-01-27 2009-03-20 Самсунг Электроникс Ко., Лтд. Digital broadcasting send-receiving system and method of signal processing in this system
KR100594241B1 (en) 2004-01-29 2006-06-30 삼성전자주식회사 RS decoder circuit having forward Chien search type
EP1566905A1 (en) 2004-02-18 2005-08-24 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Enhanced error protection for packet-based service delivery in digital broadcasting systems
KR100595208B1 (en) 2004-03-19 2006-07-03 엘지전자 주식회사 DMB receiver and power saving method
CA2561183C (en) 2004-04-01 2012-01-24 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Digital television transmitter and receiver for using 16 state trellis coding
KR100657819B1 (en) 2004-04-01 2006-12-14 한국전자통신연구원 Double Stream Structure Digital Television Transmission and Receiving Method using Hybrid of E-8VSB, E-4VSB and P-2VSB
WO2005096219A1 (en) 2004-04-02 2005-10-13 Silverbrook Research Pty Ltd Surface having disposed therein or thereon coded data
KR101170482B1 (en) 2004-04-09 2012-08-01 마이크로나스 세미컨덕터, 인코포레이티드 Apparatus for and method of controlling the operation of an equalizer
US7853978B2 (en) 2004-04-16 2010-12-14 Endres Thomas J Remote antenna and local receiver subsystems for receiving data signals carried over analog television
US7626960B2 (en) 2004-04-20 2009-12-01 Nokia Corporation Use of signaling for auto-configuration of modulators and repeaters
US7882421B2 (en) 2004-05-06 2011-02-01 Seyfullah Halit Oguz Method and apparatus for joint source-channel map decoding
KR100692596B1 (en) 2004-05-06 2007-03-13 삼성전자주식회사 Digital broadcasting transmission/reception capable of improving receiving performance and signal processing method thereof
KR100683879B1 (en) 2004-05-06 2007-02-15 삼성전자주식회사 Digital broadcasting transmission/reception capable of improving receiving performance and signal processing method thereof
MXPA06012670A (en) 2004-05-06 2007-01-16 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Digital broadcast transmitting and receiving system having an improved receiving performance and signal processing method thereof.
KR100630086B1 (en) 2004-05-12 2006-09-27 삼성전자주식회사 Device for receiving digital multimedia broadcasting in wireless terminal
KR100708471B1 (en) 2005-05-11 2007-04-18 삼성전자주식회사 Digital broadcasting transmission/reception devices capable of improving a receiving performance and signal processing method thereof
CA2565284C (en) 2004-05-13 2014-09-09 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Digital broadcasting transmission/reception devices capable of improving a receiving performance and signal processing method thereof
KR100667316B1 (en) 2005-05-18 2007-01-12 삼성전자주식회사 Digital broadcasting transmission/reception devices capable of improving a receiving performance and signal processing method thereof
US7852961B2 (en) 2004-05-20 2010-12-14 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Digital broadcasting transmission/reception devices capable of improving a receiving performance and signal processing method thereof
US8588203B2 (en) 2004-06-04 2013-11-19 Qualcomm Incorporated Wireless communication system with improved broadcast coverage
WO2005122573A1 (en) 2004-06-05 2005-12-22 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Digital broadcasting transmission/reception system utilizing srs and trs code to improve receiving performance and signal processing method thereof
KR100577007B1 (en) 2004-06-22 2006-05-10 현대자동차주식회사 Telematics Terminal
KR100744055B1 (en) 2004-06-23 2007-07-30 삼성전자주식회사 Digital broadcasting transmission/reception system capable of improving receiving and equalizing performance and signal processing method thereof
GB2415873A (en) 2004-06-30 2006-01-04 Nokia Corp Erasure information generation in Forward Error Correction decoding
KR101165379B1 (en) 2004-07-15 2012-07-17 삼성전자주식회사 Digital broadcasting transmission/reception system having improved receiving performance and signal processing method thereof
KR100580195B1 (en) 2004-07-16 2006-05-16 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for recording with which time shift function is practicable at plural channel
KR100708929B1 (en) 2004-07-26 2007-04-17 에스케이 텔레콤주식회사 Method for providing broadcasting and data service using broadcasting and terrestrial network
KR100626665B1 (en) 2004-08-03 2006-09-25 한국전자통신연구원 Base of IP DMB data translation apparatus and method for DMB receiving system using that
KR100678936B1 (en) 2004-08-06 2007-02-07 삼성전자주식회사 Method for selecting modulation method of digital broadcast receiver and the receiver thereof
US7324591B2 (en) 2004-08-17 2008-01-29 Zenith Electronics Corporation Adaptive equalizer
KR100651939B1 (en) 2004-08-18 2006-12-06 엘지전자 주식회사 Broadcasting receiver and decoding method
WO2006028337A1 (en) 2004-09-06 2006-03-16 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for receiving digital multimedia broadcasting signals
US20060053436A1 (en) 2004-09-07 2006-03-09 Echostar Technologies Corporation Wireless back channel for satellite television system
MX2007003049A (en) 2004-09-15 2007-08-02 Korea Electronics Telecomm Digital television transmission and receiving apparatus and method using 1/4 rate coded robust data.
GB0420540D0 (en) 2004-09-15 2004-10-20 Nokia Corp Burst transmission in a digital broadcasting network
KR20060029495A (en) 2004-10-01 2006-04-06 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for decoding of reed-solomon symbols
JP4828906B2 (en) 2004-10-06 2011-11-30 三星電子株式会社 Providing and receiving video service in digital audio broadcasting, and apparatus therefor
FR2876196B1 (en) 2004-10-06 2006-12-01 Renault Sas DEVICE FOR MANAGING THE POWER SUPPLY OF THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OF A MOTOR VEHICLE
KR100631203B1 (en) 2004-10-07 2006-10-04 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus for carrier and symbol timing recovery at VSB type receiver and methods thereof
JP4511906B2 (en) 2004-11-02 2010-07-28 パナソニック株式会社 Transmitting apparatus and transmitting method
KR100646851B1 (en) 2004-11-03 2006-11-23 한국전자통신연구원 Terrestrial DMB broadcasting tranceiving System for synchronizing data service with audio/video service
US7933365B2 (en) 2004-11-16 2011-04-26 Lg Electronics Inc. Enhanced VSB Viterbi decoder
JP4417820B2 (en) 2004-11-19 2010-02-17 パイオニア株式会社 Digital receiver
KR101080966B1 (en) 2004-11-23 2011-11-08 엘지전자 주식회사 Apparatus and method for transmitting/receiving broadcast signal
KR20060062464A (en) 2004-12-03 2006-06-12 현대자동차주식회사 Point of interest service method for using digital multimedia broadcasting
KR20060063258A (en) 2004-12-07 2006-06-12 엘지전자 주식회사 System for hands-free of vehicle
KR100702356B1 (en) 2004-12-10 2007-04-02 한국전자통신연구원 Apparatus and method for receiving of digital signal broadcasting with built-in sub-channel decoder
US20060130099A1 (en) 2004-12-13 2006-06-15 Rooyen Pieter V Method and system for cellular network and integrated broadcast television (TV) downlink with intelligent service control without feedback
US8199781B2 (en) 2004-12-14 2012-06-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Device and method for demultiplexing received transport stream in digital broadcasting receiver
KR101036471B1 (en) 2004-12-15 2011-05-25 엘지전자 주식회사 Enhanced 8-VSB transmitting/receiving system, and data attribute generating apparatus and it's method
KR100777280B1 (en) 2004-12-17 2007-11-20 엘지전자 주식회사 Forward error correction in digital multimedia broadcasting a receiving set
KR20060070138A (en) 2004-12-20 2006-06-23 엘지전자 주식회사 Apparatus and method for recovering e8-vsb map information
KR100687614B1 (en) 2004-12-21 2007-02-27 엘지노텔 주식회사 Method for dynamic assignment of IP address in IP based keyphone system
KR20060072573A (en) 2004-12-23 2006-06-28 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital multimedia broadcasting transmitter and receiver
US7593390B2 (en) 2004-12-30 2009-09-22 Intel Corporation Distributed voice network
US20060146951A1 (en) 2005-01-05 2006-07-06 Integrated Programmable Communications, Inc. System and method of processing frequency-diversity coded signals with low sampling rate
US8826093B2 (en) 2005-01-19 2014-09-02 Qualcomm Incorporated Power saving method for coded transmission
KR100790117B1 (en) 2005-02-02 2007-12-31 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for selecting digital broadcasting channel
KR101066292B1 (en) 2005-02-07 2011-09-20 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for receiving selectively the data broadcasting of digital multimedia broadcasting
US7590169B2 (en) 2005-02-07 2009-09-15 Qualcomm Incorporated Multipath interference reduction on pilot estimation with legacy system interoperability
KR100630191B1 (en) 2005-02-28 2006-09-29 삼성전자주식회사 Mobile communication terminal and method of providing a user interface using received terrestrial digital broadcasting data
KR100713664B1 (en) 2005-02-28 2007-05-02 주식회사 쏠리테크 Apparatus and method for terrestrial digital multimedia broadcasting using satellite data path, and framing method for the same
US7535980B2 (en) 2005-03-01 2009-05-19 Broadcom Corporation Selectively disabling interference cancellation based on channel dispersion estimation
US7684481B2 (en) 2005-03-01 2010-03-23 Broadcom Corporation High speed data packet access minimum mean squared equalization with direct matrix inversion training
US7532857B2 (en) 2005-03-02 2009-05-12 Rohde & Schwarz Gmbh & Co. Kg Apparatus, systems and methods for providing time diversity for mobile broadcast services
US20060245516A1 (en) 2005-03-02 2006-11-02 Rohde & Schwarz, Inc. Apparatus, systems and methods for providing in-band atsc vestigial sideband signaling or out-of-band signaling
KR100708482B1 (en) 2005-03-04 2007-04-18 삼성전자주식회사 Channel equalizer and method for equalizing channel
KR100957267B1 (en) 2005-03-08 2010-05-12 콸콤 인코포레이티드 Digital broadcast methods and apparatus
KR101092557B1 (en) 2005-03-11 2011-12-13 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus for detecting synchronization and VSB receiver using the same and method thereof
KR20060102160A (en) 2005-03-23 2006-09-27 엘지전자 주식회사 Method of decoding crc in digital multimedia broadcasting a receiving set
KR100708479B1 (en) 2005-03-24 2007-04-18 삼성전자주식회사 Digital broadcasting transmission/reception device and method thereof
US7356549B1 (en) 2005-04-11 2008-04-08 Unisys Corporation System and method for cross-reference linking of local partitioned B-trees
KR20060110426A (en) 2005-04-19 2006-10-25 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus of data transmission and reception in a digital broadcasting system and system thereof
KR100689440B1 (en) 2005-04-26 2007-03-08 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus for data transmission and reception and method for data transmission and reception
KR100819266B1 (en) 2005-04-27 2008-10-27 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for transmitter and receiver of supporting priority data transmission in a digital audio broadcasting system
KR100673199B1 (en) 2005-04-27 2007-01-22 에스케이 텔레콤주식회사 Portable digital tv receiving device and method of conditional access
US20060245505A1 (en) 2005-05-02 2006-11-02 Limberg Allen L Digital television signals using linear block coding
KR100693701B1 (en) 2005-05-11 2007-03-09 주식회사 대우일렉트로닉스 Method for classifying application for data broadcasting in time-shift and application synchronization method thereof
US7920602B2 (en) 2005-05-23 2011-04-05 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method for formatting digital broadcast transport stream packet for improved receiving performance, digital broadcast transmitter, and signal processing method thereof
JP2007010368A (en) 2005-06-28 2007-01-18 Pioneer Electronic Corp Navigation device, navigation method, and navigation program
KR100735359B1 (en) 2005-07-04 2007-07-04 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus for data transmission and reception and method for data transmission and reception
KR101129387B1 (en) 2005-07-12 2012-03-27 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for providing IP datacasting service in Digital Audio Broadcasting system
US7711045B2 (en) 2005-07-13 2010-05-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Digital broadcast transmitter/receiver having improved receiving performance and signal processing method thereof
JP4717072B2 (en) * 2005-08-12 2011-07-06 富士通株式会社 Transmitter
KR100735276B1 (en) 2005-08-18 2007-07-03 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for decoding a mpe-fec frame in a dvb-h system
US8606037B2 (en) 2005-08-24 2013-12-10 Intel Corporation Techniques to improve contrast enhancement
KR20070024162A (en) 2005-08-26 2007-03-02 현대자동차주식회사 Throttle valve of automobile
ES2504190T3 (en) 2005-09-06 2014-10-08 Nippon Telegraph And Telephone Corporation Radio transmitter device, radio receiver device, radio transmission method, radio reception method, wireless communication system and wireless communication method
KR100724891B1 (en) 2005-09-16 2007-06-04 삼성전자주식회사 Device and method of multi-cyclic redundancy checking for acquiring section detection and reliability information in dvb-h system
KR100735399B1 (en) 2005-09-23 2007-07-04 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for handover using interworking with cellular system in digital broadcasting system
JP4643406B2 (en) 2005-09-27 2011-03-02 株式会社東芝 Broadcast receiver
KR101191181B1 (en) 2005-09-27 2012-10-15 엘지전자 주식회사 Transmitting/receiving system of digital broadcasting and data structure
CA2562220C (en) 2005-10-05 2013-06-25 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of processing traffic information and digital broadcast system
KR101276820B1 (en) 2006-09-15 2013-06-18 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and data processing method
KR101147759B1 (en) * 2005-10-05 2012-05-25 엘지전자 주식회사 Transmitting/receiving system of digital broadcasting
CA2562427C (en) 2005-10-05 2012-07-10 Lg Electronics Inc. A digital broadcast system and method of processing traffic information
US7668209B2 (en) 2005-10-05 2010-02-23 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of processing traffic information and digital broadcast system
US7720062B2 (en) 2005-10-05 2010-05-18 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of processing traffic information and digital broadcasting system
CA2562202C (en) 2005-10-05 2013-06-18 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of processing traffic information and digital broadcast system
CA2562206C (en) * 2005-10-05 2012-07-10 Lg Electronics Inc. A method and digital broadcast transmitter for transmitting a digital broadcast signal
US7804860B2 (en) 2005-10-05 2010-09-28 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of processing traffic information and digital broadcast system
KR101147760B1 (en) 2005-10-06 2012-05-25 엘지전자 주식회사 Transmitting/ receiving system and method of digital broadcasting, and data structure
US8711947B2 (en) 2005-10-11 2014-04-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Digital broadcasting transmission and reception system, and a signal processing method using turbo processing and turbo decoding
US8619876B2 (en) 2005-10-11 2013-12-31 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method for turbo transmission of digital broadcasting transport stream, a digital broadcasting transmission and reception system, and a signal processing method thereof
US8009781B2 (en) 2005-10-12 2011-08-30 Lg Electronics, Inc. DTV receiver and method of processing signal in DTV receiver
KR101370889B1 (en) 2005-12-28 2014-03-10 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and processing method
US7932956B2 (en) * 2005-10-20 2011-04-26 Lg Electronics, Inc. DTV transmitter and method of coding data in DTV transmitter
KR100811184B1 (en) 2005-10-21 2008-03-07 삼성전자주식회사 Outer encoder, and, method thereof
KR100797176B1 (en) 2005-10-21 2008-01-23 삼성전자주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and method thereof
KR100794790B1 (en) 2005-10-21 2008-01-21 삼성전자주식회사 Trellis encoding device for encoding dual tranmission stream and method thereof
KR100740209B1 (en) 2005-10-21 2007-07-18 삼성전자주식회사 Digital broadcasting receiving system and method thereof
KR100794791B1 (en) 2005-10-21 2008-01-21 삼성전자주식회사 Turbo stream processing device and method thereof
US7769111B2 (en) 2005-10-27 2010-08-03 Broadcom Corporation Detection of large carrier offsets using a timing loop
KR100774168B1 (en) 2005-11-16 2007-11-08 엘지전자 주식회사 Video display apparatus and control method thereof including time shift function
KR101199369B1 (en) 2005-11-25 2012-11-09 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and processing method
US7983354B2 (en) 2005-11-25 2011-07-19 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Digital broadcast transmitter/receiver having an improved receiving performance and signal processing method thereof
KR101191182B1 (en) 2005-11-26 2012-10-15 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and processing method
KR101216079B1 (en) * 2005-11-30 2012-12-26 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and processing method
US7773961B2 (en) 2005-12-09 2010-08-10 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for channel estimation without signaling overhead
CN101331733B (en) 2005-12-16 2011-12-07 杜比瑞典公司 Apparatus and method for generating and interpreting a data stream having a series of segments using data in subsequent data frames
US7797607B2 (en) * 2005-12-27 2010-09-14 Lg Electronics, Inc. DTV transmitter and method of coding main and enhanced data in DTV transmitter
KR101208504B1 (en) 2005-12-27 2012-12-05 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and processing method
US7823051B2 (en) 2006-01-03 2010-10-26 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Digital broadcasting transmission system and method thereof
US7913152B2 (en) 2006-01-03 2011-03-22 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Transmitter and system for transmitting/receiving digital broadcasting stream and method thereof
WO2007081102A1 (en) 2006-01-10 2007-07-19 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
WO2007081108A1 (en) 2006-01-13 2007-07-19 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
US7644343B2 (en) 2006-01-17 2010-01-05 Rajugopal Gubbi Error resilience methods for multi-protocol encapsulation forward error correction implementations
KR101208509B1 (en) 2006-01-20 2012-12-05 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and processing method
WO2007086654A1 (en) 2006-01-25 2007-08-02 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
KR20070079719A (en) 2006-02-03 2007-08-08 삼성전자주식회사 Apprartus and method for receiving data in a mobile broadcasting terminal
WO2007091779A1 (en) * 2006-02-10 2007-08-16 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting receiver and method of processing data
WO2007100184A1 (en) * 2006-02-28 2007-09-07 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
WO2007100185A1 (en) * 2006-02-28 2007-09-07 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
WO2007100186A1 (en) * 2006-03-02 2007-09-07 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
KR20070091962A (en) 2006-03-08 2007-09-12 한국방송공사 Method for offerring naration of data channel dmb using animation and recording media implementing the same
US8179980B2 (en) 2006-03-15 2012-05-15 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Robust DTV signals that can overcome burst errors up to 1040 bytes or more in length
KR100661005B1 (en) 2006-03-24 2006-12-26 삼성전자주식회사 Dmb based navigation mobile terminal and method of executing navigation using the same
US7639751B2 (en) 2006-04-04 2009-12-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Advanced-VSB system (A-VSB)
WO2007124441A2 (en) 2006-04-20 2007-11-01 Qualcomm Incorporated Tagging language for broadcast radio
WO2007126196A1 (en) 2006-04-29 2007-11-08 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
US7945844B2 (en) 2006-05-22 2011-05-17 Limberg Allen Leroy Robust DTV signals transmitted at two thirds the code rate of ordinary 8VSB DTV signals
KR100771631B1 (en) 2006-05-23 2007-10-31 엘지전자 주식회사 Broadcasting system and method of processing data in a Broadcasting system
WO2007136165A1 (en) 2006-05-23 2007-11-29 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
KR101227504B1 (en) 2006-06-09 2013-01-29 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and processing method
WO2007145411A1 (en) 2006-06-16 2007-12-21 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
MX2009000040A (en) * 2006-07-07 2009-01-30 Lg Electronics Inc Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data.
US7787491B2 (en) 2006-08-25 2010-08-31 Broadcom Corporation Method and system for synchronizable E-VSB enhanced data interleaving and data expansion
US7729381B2 (en) 2006-09-15 2010-06-01 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. In-band media performance monitoring
US7643235B2 (en) 2006-09-28 2010-01-05 Seagate Technology Llc Synchronization for data communication
KR101253176B1 (en) 2006-11-02 2013-04-10 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and data processing method
KR101291684B1 (en) 2006-12-07 2013-08-01 삼성전자주식회사 Method of channel estimation based on doubly adjacent windows and apparatus thereof
KR101253178B1 (en) 2006-12-11 2013-04-10 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and data processing method
KR101221913B1 (en) * 2006-12-20 2013-01-15 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and data processing method
US8059655B2 (en) 2006-12-27 2011-11-15 Newport Media, Inc. Unified interfacing for DVB-T/H mobile TV applications
US7889766B2 (en) * 2007-01-19 2011-02-15 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
KR20080077473A (en) * 2007-02-20 2008-08-25 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
KR101259118B1 (en) 2007-02-23 2013-04-26 엘지전자 주식회사 Apparatus and method for transmitting broadcasting signals
KR101343407B1 (en) 2007-02-26 2013-12-20 삼성전자주식회사 Digital transmission system for transmitting additional data and method thereof
KR101285887B1 (en) 2007-03-26 2013-07-11 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
KR101253185B1 (en) 2007-03-26 2013-04-10 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and data processing method
KR101285888B1 (en) 2007-03-30 2013-07-11 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
KR101253187B1 (en) 2007-04-05 2013-04-10 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
KR101221914B1 (en) 2007-04-06 2013-01-15 엘지전자 주식회사 Apparatus and method for transmitting Digital broadcasting signal
KR101276863B1 (en) * 2007-04-11 2013-06-18 엘지전자 주식회사 Apparatus and method for receiving Digital broadcasting signal
KR101351019B1 (en) 2007-04-13 2014-01-13 엘지전자 주식회사 apparatus for transmitting and receiving a broadcast signal and method of transmitting and receiving a broadcast signal
KR101351026B1 (en) * 2007-04-13 2014-01-13 엘지전자 주식회사 apparatus for transmitting and receiving a broadcast signal and method of transmitting and receiving a broadcast signal
US7848400B2 (en) 2007-04-26 2010-12-07 Broadcom Corporation Retransmission of reordered/coded data in response to presumed receiver decoding failure
US20100138877A1 (en) 2007-06-21 2010-06-03 Paul Knutson Apparatus and method for use in a mobile/handheld communications system
KR101461958B1 (en) 2007-06-29 2014-11-14 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
KR20090004660A (en) 2007-07-02 2009-01-12 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
WO2009005326A2 (en) 2007-07-04 2009-01-08 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
US20090028230A1 (en) 2007-07-27 2009-01-29 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for improving quality of service for reception in digital television broadcast systems
WO2009028857A2 (en) 2007-08-24 2009-03-05 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
US7705920B2 (en) 2007-08-24 2010-04-27 Lg Electronics, Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
CA2697483C (en) 2007-08-24 2013-05-21 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting receiver and method for controlling the same
US7646828B2 (en) 2007-08-24 2010-01-12 Lg Electronics, Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
WO2009038408A2 (en) 2007-09-21 2009-03-26 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and data processing method
WO2009038409A2 (en) 2007-09-21 2009-03-26 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
US20090111486A1 (en) 2007-10-26 2009-04-30 Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab Device and method for generating a message
KR101538919B1 (en) 2008-04-22 2015-07-24 삼성전자주식회사 Transmitting additional information in the headers of encapsulating data packets in mobile/handheld(m/h) dtv signals
WO2009145588A2 (en) 2008-05-29 2009-12-03 한국전자통신연구원 Method and apparatus for transmitting/receiving broadcasting-communication data
US8750315B2 (en) 2009-01-23 2014-06-10 Akamai Technologies, Inc. Efficiently storing transport streams
US8331500B2 (en) * 2009-05-13 2012-12-11 Lg Electronics Inc. Transmitting/receiving system and method of processing broadcast signal in transmitting/receiving system
US8559564B2 (en) * 2009-05-21 2013-10-15 Lg Electronics Inc. Transmitting/receiving system and method of processing broadcast signal in transmitting/receiving system
US8432961B2 (en) * 2009-06-11 2013-04-30 Lg Electronics Inc. Transmitting/receiving system and method of processing broadcast signal in transmitting/receiving system

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20020187767A1 (en) * 2001-05-02 2002-12-12 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Timing recovery switching for an adaptive digital broadband beamforming (antenna diversity) for ATSC terrestrial DTV based on segment sync detection
US20030206053A1 (en) * 2002-04-04 2003-11-06 Jingsong Xia Carrier recovery for DTV receivers
US20060078072A1 (en) * 2004-10-12 2006-04-13 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Synchronization signal detection circuit and method of digital television (DTV) receiver

Cited By (51)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10277255B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2019-04-30 Lg Electronics Inc. Channel equalizer and method of processing broadcast signal in DTV receiving system
US9185413B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2015-11-10 Lg Electronics Inc. Channel equalizer and method of processing broadcast signal in DTV receiving system
US9178536B2 (en) 2006-04-29 2015-11-03 Lg Electronics Inc. DTV transmitting system and method of processing broadcast data
US8984381B2 (en) 2006-04-29 2015-03-17 LG Electronics Inc. LLP DTV transmitting system and method of processing broadcast data
US9425827B2 (en) 2006-04-29 2016-08-23 Lg Electronics Inc. DTV transmitting system and method of processing broadcast data
US9680506B2 (en) 2006-04-29 2017-06-13 Lg Electronics Inc. DTV transmitting system and method of processing broadcast data
US9564989B2 (en) 2006-05-23 2017-02-07 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital television transmitting system and receiving system and method of processing broadcast data
US10057009B2 (en) 2006-05-23 2018-08-21 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital television transmitting system and receiving system and method of processing broadcast data
US10454616B2 (en) 2006-10-12 2019-10-22 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital television transmitting system and receiving system and method of processing broadcasting data
US9392281B2 (en) 2006-10-12 2016-07-12 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital television transmitting system and receiving system and method of processing broadcasting data
US9831986B2 (en) 2006-10-12 2017-11-28 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital television transmitting system and receiving system and method of processing broadcasting data
US10070160B2 (en) 2007-03-26 2018-09-04 Lg Electronics Inc. DTV receiving system and method of processing DTV signal
US9736508B2 (en) 2007-03-26 2017-08-15 Lg Electronics Inc. DTV receiving system and method of processing DTV signal
US9912354B2 (en) 2007-03-26 2018-03-06 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
US9924206B2 (en) 2007-03-26 2018-03-20 Lg Electronics Inc. DTV receiving system and method of processing DTV signal
US9198005B2 (en) 2007-03-26 2015-11-24 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
US10244274B2 (en) 2007-03-26 2019-03-26 Lg Electronics Inc. DTV receiving system and method of processing DTV signal
US9521441B2 (en) 2007-03-30 2016-12-13 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
US9660764B2 (en) 2007-07-04 2017-05-23 Lg Electronics Inc. Broadcast transmitter and method of processing broadcast service data for transmission
US9444579B2 (en) 2007-07-04 2016-09-13 Lg Electronics Inc. Broadcast transmitter and method of processing broadcast service data for transmission
US8954829B2 (en) 2007-07-04 2015-02-10 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
US9094159B2 (en) 2007-07-04 2015-07-28 Lg Electronics Inc. Broadcasting transmitting system and method of processing broadcast data in the broadcast transmitting system
US9184770B2 (en) 2007-07-04 2015-11-10 Lg Electronics Inc. Broadcast transmitter and method of processing broadcast service data for transmission
WO2009028857A2 (en) 2007-08-24 2009-03-05 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
EP2191644A2 (en) * 2007-08-24 2010-06-02 Lg Electronics Inc. Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
EP2191644A4 (en) * 2007-08-24 2015-01-07 Lg Electronics Inc Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data in digital broadcasting system
US9800897B2 (en) 2007-12-11 2017-10-24 Rohde & Schwarz Gmbh & Co. Kg Method and device for forming a common datastream according to the ATSC standard
US9054953B2 (en) 2008-06-16 2015-06-09 Lg Electronics Inc. Home appliance and home appliance system
US8693507B2 (en) 2008-06-25 2014-04-08 Rohde & Schwarz Gmbh & Co. Kg Apparatus, systems, methods and computer program products for producing a single frequency network for ATSC mobile / handheld services
US8553619B2 (en) 2008-07-04 2013-10-08 Rohde & Schwarz Gmbh & Co. Kg Method and a system for time synchronisation between a control centre and several transmitters
US8532188B2 (en) 2008-10-02 2013-09-10 Rohde & Schwarz Gmbh & Co. Kg Methods and apparatus for generating a transport data stream with image data
US8774069B2 (en) 2008-11-06 2014-07-08 Rohde & Schwarz Gmbh & Co. Kg Method and system for synchronized mapping of data packets in an ATSC data stream
US8982745B2 (en) 2009-03-21 2015-03-17 Rohde & Schwarz Gmbh & Co. Kg Method for improving the data rate of mobile/handheld data and the quality of channel estimation in an ATSC-M/H transport data stream
EP2234357A3 (en) * 2009-03-21 2013-05-22 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG Method for improving the data rate of mobile data and the quality of channel estimation in an ATSC-M/H transport data stream
US8854204B2 (en) 2009-04-10 2014-10-07 Lg Electronics Inc. Home appliance
US8984338B2 (en) 2009-07-06 2015-03-17 Lg Electronics Inc. Home appliance diagnosis system, and method for operating same
US8983798B2 (en) 2009-07-24 2015-03-17 Lg Electronics Inc. Diagnostic system and method for home appliance
US9644886B2 (en) 2010-01-15 2017-05-09 Lg Electronics Inc. Refrigerator and diagnostic system for the same
CN103053136B (en) * 2010-07-06 2015-11-25 Lg电子株式会社 Household electrical appliance diagnostic system and for its diagnostic method
KR101423266B1 (en) * 2010-07-06 2014-07-24 엘지전자 주식회사 Home appliance diagnosis system and diagnosis method for same
EP2592786A4 (en) * 2010-07-06 2014-01-22 Lg Electronics Inc Home appliance diagnosis system and diagnosis method for same
EP2592786A2 (en) * 2010-07-06 2013-05-15 LG Electronics Inc. Home appliance diagnosis system and diagnosis method for same
CN103053136A (en) * 2010-07-06 2013-04-17 Lg电子株式会社 Home appliance diagnosis system and diagnosis method for same
US10325269B2 (en) 2010-07-06 2019-06-18 Lg Electronics Inc. Home appliance diagnosis system and diagnosis method for same
US8989021B2 (en) 2011-01-20 2015-03-24 Rohde & Schwarz Gmbh & Co. Kg Universal broadband broadcasting
US9197437B2 (en) 2011-08-02 2015-11-24 Lg Electronics Inc. Home appliance, home appliance diagnostic system, and method
US9979560B2 (en) 2011-08-18 2018-05-22 Lg Electronics Inc. Diagnostic apparatus and method for home appliance
US9495859B2 (en) 2012-07-03 2016-11-15 Lg Electronics Inc. Home appliance and method of outputting signal sound for diagnosis
US9013320B2 (en) 2012-07-09 2015-04-21 Lg Electronics Inc. Home appliance and its system
US10323922B2 (en) 2014-08-29 2019-06-18 Cardioinsight Technologies, Inc. Localization and tracking of an object
WO2016040597A1 (en) * 2014-09-11 2016-03-17 Gatesair, Inc. Hybrid modulator utilizing digital domain multiplexing

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
MX2009010194A (en) 2009-10-19
US7940855B2 (en) 2011-05-10
US10244274B2 (en) 2019-03-26
US20120038831A1 (en) 2012-02-16
EP2130382A1 (en) 2009-12-09
CN101647289B (en) 2011-06-08
KR101253185B1 (en) 2013-04-10
CN101647289A (en) 2010-02-10
CA2681046C (en) 2012-05-29
US10070160B2 (en) 2018-09-04
US9736508B2 (en) 2017-08-15
US20140230004A1 (en) 2014-08-14
EP2130382A4 (en) 2010-06-16
US9924206B2 (en) 2018-03-20
US20180014042A1 (en) 2018-01-11
US8731100B2 (en) 2014-05-20
KR20080087368A (en) 2008-10-01
US8068561B2 (en) 2011-11-29
US20190007710A1 (en) 2019-01-03
AR066398A1 (en) 2009-08-19
US20110170015A1 (en) 2011-07-14
US8223884B2 (en) 2012-07-17
CA2681046A1 (en) 2008-10-02
US20180167651A1 (en) 2018-06-14
US20080239161A1 (en) 2008-10-02
US20120246541A1 (en) 2012-09-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10244274B2 (en) DTV receiving system and method of processing DTV signal
US9912354B2 (en) Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data
USRE47856E1 (en) DTV transmitting system and method of processing DTV signal
USRE47792E1 (en) Digital broadcasting system and method of processing data

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200880010245.5

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 08723717

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2681046

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: MX/A/2009/010194

Country of ref document: MX

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2008723717

Country of ref document: EP